manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series, Service Manual, Page: 954 / 1252

Share
Download
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series Service Manual Download Page 954

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

FAN-CHK

1

Specification of DADF operation fan

Detail

To specify the fan of DADF to operate.
The fan is activated by FAN-ON.

Use Case

At operation check

Adj/Set/Operate Method

Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Display/Adj/Set Range

- DADF (1-path model)
0: ADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
- DADF (reverse model)
0: Not used

Related Service Mode

FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON

FAN-ON

1

Operation check of DADF fan

Detail

To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN-CHK.

Use Case

At operation check

Adj/Set/Operate Method

1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.

Caution

Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not
displayed).

Related Service Mode

FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK

SL-CHK

1

Specification of DADF operation solenoid

Detail

To specify the solenoid of DADF to operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.

Use Case

At operation check

Adj/Set/Operate Method

Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Display/Adj/Set Range

0 to 1
- DADF (1-path model)
0: Stamp Solenoid (SL1), 1: Not used
- DADF (reverse model)
0: Release Solenoid (SL1), 1: Stamp Solenoid (SL2)

Default Value

0

Related Service Mode

FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON

SL-ON

1

Operation check of DADF solenoid

Detail

To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.

Use Case

At operation check

Adj/Set/Operate Method

1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.

Caution

Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not
displayed).

Related Service Mode

FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK

8. Service Mode

932

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series

Page 1: ...Revision 2 1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series Servie Manual ...

Page 2: ...al over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright The copyright of this document belongs to Canon Inc This document may not be c...

Page 3: ...g the front door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the ...

Page 4: ... Lineup 7 Host machine 7 Option 8 Specifications 11 Product Specification 11 Fax Specifications 12 Weight and Size 12 Productivity 13 Pickup Specifications 23 Parts Name 34 Cross Section View 34 Control Panel 34 2 Technology 36 Basic Configuration 37 Functional Configuration 37 Original Exposure System 38 Overview 38 Magnification Ratio 40 Original Size Detection 40 Dust Detection Control 41 Image...

Page 5: ...l 93 Standby Temperature Control 93 Print Temperature Control 94 Down Sequence Control 96 Film Unit Engagement Disengagement Control 97 Fixing Slight Rotation Function 98 Fixing Arch Control 98 Fixing Unit Detection 99 Detection of Whether the Fixing Unit is New 100 Protection function 100 Pickup Feed System 102 Overview 102 Cassette Pickup Assembly 108 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Assembly 116 Fixin...

Page 6: ...61 Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 162 Removing the Control Panel 165 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB 172 Removing the Touch Panel LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 173 Original Exposure System 176 Removing the Reader Scanner Unit 176 Removing the Reader Flat Cable 179 Controller System 185 Removing the Controller Cover 185 Removing the HDD 185 Removing the Main Con...

Page 7: ...Feed Separation Roller Cassette 1 2 Cassette 3 4 Option 249 Removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller 250 Removing the Right Door Unit 252 Removing the First Delivery Unit 255 Removing the Second Delivery Unit 257 Removing the Third Delivery Unit 258 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 258 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit 260 Removing the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Unit Option 261 Removin...

Page 8: ...on error 329 E001 0006 05 Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear high temperature detection error 329 E002 0001 05 Fixing Main Thermistor temperature increase detection error 330 E002 0002 05 Fixing Main Thermistor open circuit detection error 330 E002 0003 05 Fixing Sub Thermistor Front open circuit detection error 330 E002 0004 05 Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear open circuit detection error 331 E003 0004 05 Fixi...

Page 9: ...k 353 E025 0110 05 Bottle Motor error Y 353 E025 0120 05 Bottle Motor error Y 353 E025 0168 05 No toner detection error Y 354 E025 0210 05 Bottle Motor error M 354 E025 0220 05 Bottle Motor error M 355 E025 0268 05 No toner detection error M 355 E025 0310 05 Bottle Motor error C 356 E025 0320 05 Bottle Motor error C 356 E025 0368 05 No toner detection error C 357 E025 0410 05 Bottle Motor error Bk...

Page 10: ...in high voltage sequence C 374 E199 0201 05 Error in high voltage sequence Y 374 E199 0202 05 Error in high voltage sequence M 374 E199 0203 05 Error in high voltage sequence C 374 E199 0204 05 Error in high voltage sequence K 374 E202 0001 04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error 374 E202 0002 04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error 375 E202 0003 04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error 375 E202 0004 04 Reader Scanner Uni...

Page 11: ...E315 0540 00 Image process device error 384 E315 0541 00 Image process device timeout error 385 E350 0000 00 System error 385 E350 0001 00 System error 385 E350 0002 00 System error 385 E350 0003 00 System error 385 E350 3000 00 System error 385 E351 0000 00 System error 385 E354 0001 00 System error 385 E354 0002 00 System error 385 E355 0001 00 System error 385 E355 0002 00 System error 385 E355...

Page 12: ...r K1 b Stapler Shift HP error Finisher AA1 396 E535 0001 02 Return Belt Motor error Finisher K1 396 E535 0002 02 Return Belt Motor error Finisher K1 396 E535 8001 02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor Finisher AA1 397 E535 8002 02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor Finisher AA1 397 E537 8001 02 a Front Alignment Motor error Finisher K1 b Rear Aligning Plate HP error Finisher AA1 398 E537 8002 02 a Front A...

Page 13: ... Motor Finisher AA1 411 E5F4 8002 02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor Finisher AA1 411 E5F6 8001 02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Folding Motor Finisher AA1 411 E5F6 8002 02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Folding Motor Finisher AA1 412 E5F6 8003 02 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Folding Motor clock error Finisher AA1 412 E5F8 8001 02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor Finis...

Page 14: ...0 Memory error 434 E614 0001 00 Flash PCB error 434 E614 0002 00 Flash PCB error 435 E614 0006 00 Flash PCB error 435 E614 0071 00 System verification error 435 E614 0072 00 System verification error 435 E614 0073 00 System verification error 436 E614 0074 00 Start system verification function error 436 E614 0101 00 Flash PCB error 436 E614 0111 00 Flash PCB error 436 E614 0201 00 Flash PCB error ...

Page 15: ...t the start of the New Card Reader 450 E719 0041 00 Coin vendor error 450 E719 0042 00 Coin vendor error 451 E720 0001 00 Error due to non compatible Finisher 451 E720 0001 05 Error due to non compatible Finisher 451 E730 C001 00 Error in HDD access 451 E732 0001 04 Communication error 451 E732 0010 00 Communication error 451 E732 0020 00 Communication error 452 E732 0021 00 Communication error 45...

Page 16: ...roller PCB access error 458 E748 4910 00 Main Controller PCB access error 458 E748 7011 00 Start system verification function error 458 E748 7021 00 Start system verification function error 459 E748 7022 00 Start system verification function error 459 E748 9000 00 System error 459 E749 0008 00 Error due to the DC Controller not compatible with the model 459 E753 0001 00 Download Error 459 E760 000...

Page 17: ...3 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer 465 E996 0CB4 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer 465 E996 0CB6 05 Error for collecting log Printer 465 E996 0CB7 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer 465 E996 0CB8 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer 465 Error Code FAX 466 How to View Fax Error Codes 466 User error codes 466 Service Error Code 466 Alarm Code ...

Page 18: ... REPORT 983 9 Installation 987 How to Check this Installation Procedure 989 Symbols in the Illustration 989 Checking before Installation 990 Points to Note at Installation 990 Checking Power Supply 990 Checking the Installation Environment 990 Points to Note before Installation 991 Points to Note When Moving This Host Machine 991 Checking the Installation Space 992 Combination Table of Accessory I...

Page 19: ...1049 Points to Note at Installation 1049 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation 1049 Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power 1049 Installation Outline Drawing 1049 Checking the Contents 1049 Installation procedure 1049 Operation Check 1055 Voice Operation Kit D1 1056 Points to Note at Installation 1056 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation 1056 Points to Note w...

Page 20: ...edure 1087 When Installing the USB Keyboard 1090 Removable HDD Kit AK2 1091 Points to Note at Installation 1091 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation 1091 Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power 1091 Installation Outline Drawing 1091 Checking the Contents 1091 Installation Procedure 1092 2 5inch 1TB HDD P1 1100 Points to Note at Installation 1100 Essential Items to Be Perfo...

Page 21: ...Drawing 1126 Checking the Contents 1127 Installation procedure 1127 Super G3 FAX Board AZ1 1147 Points to Note at Installation 1147 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation 1147 Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power 1147 Installation Outline Drawing 1147 Checking the Contents 1147 Installation Procedure 1148 Operation Check 1153 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AU1 1154 Points to...

Page 22: ...ils 1182 General Circuit Diagram 1183 Host machine 1183 ADF 1195 Control Panel 1197 Reader 1199 Software Counter Specifications 1201 Removal 1207 Overview 1207 Work Procedure 1207 Target PCBs of Automatic Update 1210 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored 1211 Contents xix ...

Page 23: ...Safety Precautions Laser 2 Power Supply Lithium Battery 3 Toner Safety 4 Notes on works 4 ...

Page 24: ...hown in the figure If you must open the cover and disable the interlock switches for servicing be sure to prevent the eye from exposure The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 1 Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt der Augenschäden verursachen kann wenn man in diesen ...

Page 25: ...e and over untie the cord binding and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord CAUTION Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord It may cause a fire or electrical shock The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible Notes When Handling a Lithium Ba...

Page 26: ... a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry cloth CAUTION Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust moisture or oily smoke will cause a fire Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure Be careful not to be injured by burrs of edges sharp corners or protrusion...

Page 27: ...e Sicherung kann sich im Nullleiter befinden und das Hauptnetz muss abgetrennt werden um die Phasenleiter stromlos zu machen Points to Note when Tightening a Screw For reduction in weight thin plates are used in some parts of this machine In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below strongly tightening the screw may damage or deform the screw hole In the ca...

Page 28: ...Product Overview 1 Product Lineup 7 Specifications 11 Parts Name 34 ...

Page 29: ...2 equipped as standard 3 4 optional Cassette Heater Equipped as standard HDD Equipped as standard 1 line Fax Equipped as standard C3530i III C3530 III C3525i III C3525 III C3520i III C3520 III Print speed BW Color 30 30 ppm 25 25 ppm 20 20 ppm Reader Equipped as standard ADF Equipped as standard Copyboard Finished Stamp Equipped as standard Expansion Delivery Kit Equipped as standard Cassette 1 2 ...

Page 30: ...nk Cartridge C1 5 Stamp Unit B1 6 ADF Access Handle A1 7 Cassette Feeding Unit AP1 8 FL Cassette BE1 9 FL Cassette BF1 10 Copy Tray J2 11 Inner 2way Tray J1 12 Staple Finisher AA1 13 Inner Finisher K1 14 Booklet Finisher AA1 15 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A1 16 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 17 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 18 3 Way Unit D1 19 Reader Heater Unit L2 1 Product Overview 8 ...

Page 31: ...der Attachment B5 4 Power Supply Cable W1 5 Super G3 FAX Board AU1 6 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AU1 7 Voice Guidance Kit G1 8 Voice Operation Kit D1 9 Serial Interface Kit K3 10 Copy Control Interface Kit A1 11 2 5inch 1TB HDD P1 12 Removable HDD Kit AK2 13 IC Card Reader Box C1 14 Copy Card Reader F1 15 Connection Kit A1 for Bluetooth LE 16 Remote Fax Kit A1 IP FAX Expansion Kit B1E 1 Product Ov...

Page 32: ...T BF1 PS Printer Kit BF1 PCL PRT KIT AS1 Barcode Printing Kit D1E SEARCHABLE PDF F1 Reader Extensions F1 SCAN ENHANCE F1 Canon DGTL SIGNATURE A1 iR ADV Security Kit T1 for IEEE 2600 Common Criteria Certification 1 Product Overview 10 ...

Page 33: ...ivalent 600dpi at 600dpi mode Max guaranteed image size 300 x 450 5 mm Long size paper print 300 x 1193 5 mm Long size paper copy 300 x 623 5 mm Max printable size 305 450 5 mm CoatedPaper 221 300gsm 300 450 5 mm Long size paper print 300 1193 5 mm Long size paper copy 300 x 623 5 mm Warm up time From Start up Quick start mode OFF Time between power on and appearance of the copy icon on the main m...

Page 34: ...Type SuperG3 G3 Sending Original Sizes AB configuration A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 2 B5R 3 A5 3 A5R 3 Inch configuration 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR Receiving Paper Sizes AB configuration A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R Inch configuration 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR Other K8 K16 No of Memory RX Jobs Up to 320 jobs Transmission Times Approximately 2 6 seconds When sending LTR Canon original paper Normal 8 pels x 3 85 l...

Page 35: ...y 2 129 150 g m2 Heavy 3 151 163 g m2 Bond A4 LTR 15 7 11 7 15 11 7 11 9 7 A3 LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3 SRA3 3 12 18 7 5 4 4 4 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K16 15 2 7 2 11 2 7 2 15 2 11 2 7 2 11 2 9 2 7 2 A5 A6R 15 2 11 2 STMT 11 2 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 10 2 5 2 7 2 5 2 10 2 7 2 5 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 B4 LGL K8 7 2 3 2 5 2 3 2 7 2 5 2 3 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 Heavy 4 164 180 g m2 Heavy 5 181 220 g m2 A4 LTR 15 7 11 7 15 11 7 11 ...

Page 36: ...ed 15 2 11 2 Yougatanaga 3 Short Edge Feed 10 2 7 2 Kakugata 2 Short Edge Feed 7 2 5 2 No 10 COM10 Long Edge Feed 11 2 No 10 COM10 Short Edge Feed 10 2 7 2 ISO C5 Long Edge Feed 15 2 11 2 ISO C5 Short Edge Feed 7 2 DL Long Edge Feed 11 2 DL Short Edge Feed 10 2 7 2 Monarch Long Edge Feed 11 2 Monarch Short Edge Feed 15 2 11 2 2 3 way unit model Unit images min Media Size 1 side 2 side Cassette MP ...

Page 37: ...R LTRR B5R K16R 10 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 B4 LGL K8 7 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 Heavy 4 164 180 g m2 Heavy 5 181 220 g m2 A4 LTR 15 11 15 11 A3 LDR 7 5 5 4 SRA3 3 12 18 3 3 3 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K1 6 15 2 11 2 15 2 11 2 A5 A6R 15 2 11 2 STMT 11 2 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 10 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 B4 LGL K8 7 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 Heavy 6 221 256 g m2 Heavy 7 257 300 g m2 A4 LTR 11 A3 LDR 5 SRA3 Not support heavy7 3 12 18 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K1...

Page 38: ...te MP Tray output tray1 2 output tray3 output tray1 2 output tray3 output tray1 output tray2 output tray3 output tray1 output tray2 output tray3 Plain Recycled Thin 1 Thin 2 Color Pre Punched A4 LTR 25 15 23 15 25 19 15 23 18 15 A3 LDR 15 7 11 7 15 10 7 11 9 7 SRA3 5 12 18 7 5 4 4 4 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K16 25 4 15 4 23 4 15 4 25 4 19 4 15 4 23 4 18 4 15 4 A5 A6 25 4 23 4 STMT 23 4 A4R LTRR B5R K16R...

Page 39: ...A5 A6R 12 2 11 2 STMT 11 2 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 10 2 5 2 7 2 5 2 10 2 7 2 5 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 B4 LGL K8 7 2 3 2 5 2 3 2 7 2 5 2 3 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 Heavy 6 221 256 g m2 Heavy 7 257 300 g m2 A4 LTR 11 A3 LDR 5 SRA3 Not support heavy7 3 12 18 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K16 11 2 STMT A5 A6R 11 2 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 7 2 B4 LGL K8 5 2 Label A4 LTR 11 A4R LTRR 7 2 B4 5 2 Transparency A4 LTR 10 10 Post Card Post Card 12 2 11...

Page 40: ...tput tray1 2 output tray3 output tray1 output tray2 3 output tray1 output tray2 3 Plain Recycled Thin 1 Thin 2 Color Pre Punched A4 LTR 25 23 25 23 A3 LDR 15 11 10 9 SRA3 5 12 18 7 5 4 4 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K1 6 25 4 23 4 25 4 23 4 A5 A6R 25 4 23 4 STMT 23 4 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 20 4 15 4 12 4 10 4 B4 LGL K8 15 4 11 4 10 4 9 4 Heavy 1 106 128 g m2 Heavy 2 129 150 g m2 Heavy 3 151 163 g m2 Bond A4 LTR 12...

Page 41: ...2 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 7 2 B4 LGL K8 5 2 Label A4 LTR 11 A4R LTRR 7 2 B4 5 2 Transparency A4 LTR 10 10 Post Card Post Card 12 2 11 2 Reply Post Card 12 2 11 2 4 Side Post Card 12 2 11 2 Envelope Nagagata 3 Long Edge Feed 12 2 11 2 Nagagata 3 Short Edge Feed 10 2 7 2 Yougatanaga 3 Long Edge Feed 12 2 11 2 Yougatanaga 3 Short Edge Feed 10 2 7 2 Kakugata 2 Short Edge Feed 7 2 5 2 No 10 COM10 Long Edge F...

Page 42: ...y 2 129 150g Heavy 3 151 163g Bond A4 LTR 10 7 10 7 10 7 7 10 7 7 A3 LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3 SRA3 3 12 18 7 5 4 4 4 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K16 10 2 7 2 10 2 7 2 10 2 7 2 7 2 10 2 7 2 7 2 A5 A6R 10 2 10 2 STMT 10 2 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 10 2 5 2 7 2 5 2 10 2 7 2 5 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 B4 LGL K8 7 2 3 2 5 2 3 2 7 2 5 2 3 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 Heavy 4 164 180g Heavy 5 181 220g A4 LTR 10 7 10 7 10 7 7 10 7 7 A3 LDR 7 3 5 3 ...

Page 43: ... Feed 10 2 7 2 Kakugata 2 Short Edge Feed 7 2 5 2 No 10 COM10 Long Edge Feed 10 2 No 10 COM10 Short Edge Feed 10 2 7 2 ISO C5 Long Edge Feed 10 2 10 2 ISO C5 Short Edge Feed 7 2 DL Long Edge Feed 10 2 DL Short Edge Feed 10 2 7 2 Monarch Long Edge Feed 10 2 Monarch Short Edge Feed 10 2 10 2 2 3 way unit model Unit images min Media Size 1 side 2 side Cassette MP Tray Cassette MP Tray output tray1 2 ...

Page 44: ... B5R K16R 10 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 B4 LGL K8 7 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 Heavy 4 164 180g Heavy 5 181 220g A4 LTR 10 10 10 10 A3 LDR 7 5 5 4 SRA3 3 12 18 3 3 3 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K1 6 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 A5 A6R 10 2 10 2 STMT 10 2 A4R LTRR B5R K16R 10 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 B4 LGL K8 7 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 Heavy 6 221 256g Heavy 7 257 300g A4 LTR 10 A3 LDR 5 SRA3 Not support heavy7 3 12 18 3 A5R STMTR B5 EXE K1 6 10 2 STMT A5 A6R 10...

Page 45: ... CST 4 Thin 2 52 59 g m2 Thin 1 60 63 g m2 Plain 1 64 75 g m2 Plain 2 76 90 g m2 Plain 3 91 105 g m2 Color 1 64 82 g m2 Recycled 1 64 75 g m2 Recycled 2 76 90 g m2 Recycled 3 91 105 g m2 A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A4R Yes No Yes Yes Yes A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A6R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11x17 ...

Page 46: ... 7 8 8 1 Yes No No No No Custom size 9 Long length Yes 3 No No No No Heavy 1 106 128 g m2 Heavy 2 129 150 g m2 Heavy 3 151 163 g m2 Heavy 4 164 180 g m2 Heavy 5 181 220 g m2 A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A4R Yes No Yes Yes Yes A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A6R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11x17 Yes No Yes Ye...

Page 47: ... A3 Yes No No No No B4 Yes No No No No A4R Yes No No No No A4 Yes No No No No B5R Yes No No No No B5 Yes No No No No A5 Yes No No No No A5R Yes No No No No A6R Yes No No No No 11x17 Yes No No No No LGL Yes No No No No LTR Yes No No No No LTRR Yes No No No No STMTR Yes No No No No STMT Yes No No No No SRA3 Yes No No No No 12x18 Yes No No No No EXEC Yes No No No No OFFICIO Yes No No No No E OFFICIO ...

Page 48: ...es No No No No STMTR Yes No No No No STMT Yes No No No No SRA3 Yes No No No No 12x18 Yes No No No No EXEC Yes No No No No OFFICIO Yes No No No No E OFFICIO Yes No No No No B OFFICIO Yes No No No No M OFFICIO Yes No No No No A OFFICIO Yes No No No No A LTR Yes No No No No A LTRR Yes No No No No GLTR R Yes No No No No GLTR Yes No No No No GLGL Yes No No No No AFLS Yes No No No No FLS Yes No No No No...

Page 49: ... OFFICIO Yes No No No No B OFFICIO Yes No No No No M OFFICIO Yes No No No No A OFFICIO Yes No No No No A LTR Yes No No No No A LTRR Yes No No No No GLTR R Yes No No No No GLTR Yes No No No No GLGL Yes No No No No AFLS Yes No No No No FLS Yes No No No No K8 Yes No No No No K16 Yes No No No No K16R Yes No No No No F4A Yes No No No No I LGL Yes No No No No Free Yes No No No No Custom size 0 2 0 4 2 1...

Page 50: ...A Yes No No No No I LGL Yes No No No No Free Yes No No No No Custom size 0 2 0 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 8 1 Yes No No No No 1 Sided Coated 5 257 300 g m2 2 Sided Coated 5 257 300 g m2 A3 Yes 1 No No No No B4 Yes 1 No No No No A4R Yes 1 No No No No A4 Yes 1 No No No No B5R Yes 1 No No No No B5 Y...

Page 51: ...ng paper 64 99 g m2 A3 Yes No No No No B4 Yes No No No No A4R Yes No No No No A4 Yes No No No No B5R Yes No No No No B5 Yes No No No No A5 Yes No No No No A5R Yes No No No No A6R Yes No No No No 11x17 Yes No No No No LGL Yes No No No No LTR Yes No No No No LTRR Yes No No No No STMTR Yes No No No No STMT Yes No No No No SRA3 Yes No No No No 12x18 Yes No No No No EXEC Yes No No No No K8 Yes No No No...

Page 52: ... 5 7 7 Yes 2 No Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Custom size 6 1 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Custom size 8 1 Yes 2 No No No No Transparency 121 220 g m2 A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Label 1 118 185 g m2 A3 Yes No No No No B4 Yes No No No No A4R Yes No No No No A4 Yes No No No No B5R Yes No No No No B5 Yes No No No No A5 Yes No No No No A5R Yes No No No No A6R Yes No No No No 11x17 Yes No No N...

Page 53: ...es B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A4R Yes No Yes Yes Yes A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A6R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11x17 Yes No Yes Yes Yes LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes STMTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMT Yes No No No No SRA3 Yes No No No No 12x18 Yes No Yes Yes Yes EXEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Ye...

Page 54: ...7 6 7 7 7 8 8 1 Yes No No No No 1 Media Adjustment Kit A1 assigned as a separate option is required 2 It is necessary to set 1 in the following service mode Lv 2 COPIER OPTION USER FLM DSPL 3 It is necessary to set 1 in the following service mode Lv 2 COPIER OPTION USER MF LG ST Paper type Available paper types are shown below See the table below for the custom paper size Type Feeding direction mm...

Page 55: ...5 7 182 to 209 9 210 to 220 Custom size 5 8 210 to 215 9 210 to 220 Custom size 5 9 216 to 269 9 210 to 220 Custom size 6 1 210 to 215 9 279 4 to 297 Custom size 6 2 216 to 269 9 279 4 to 297 Custom size 6 3 270 to 431 8 279 4 to 297 Custom size 7 2 139 7 to 147 9 297 1 to 320 Custom size 7 3 148 to 181 9 297 1 to 304 8 Custom size 7 4 182 to 215 9 297 1 to 304 8 Custom size 7 5 270 to 457 2 297 1...

Page 56: ...4 Cassette 3 Fixing Assembly Toner Container ITB Unit Drum Unit Laser Scanner Unit Waste Toner Container Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Control Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 No Name 1 Settings Registration key 2 Numeric keys 3 Energy Saver key 1 Product Overview 34 ...

Page 57: ...ss Adjustment key 6 Settings key 7 Clear key 8 Stop key 9 Start key 10 Main Power indicator 11 Error indicator 12 Processing Data indicator 13 Reset key 14 ID Log In Out key 15 NFC If equipped with NFC Kit B1 16 Touch panel display 1 Product Overview 35 ...

Page 58: ...echnology 2 Basic Configuration 37 Original Exposure System 38 Main Controller 45 Laser Exposure System 49 Image Formation System 56 Fixing System 91 Pickup Feed System 102 External Auxiliary System 124 ...

Page 59: ...ixing System and Pickup Feed System Pickup Laser Scanner Main Controller PCB DC Controller PCB Cassette Pickup Feed System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System ITB Reader ADF Transfer Fixing Delivery Deplexing Feed Drum Drum Drum Drum Original Exposure and Feed System Controller System Multi purpose Tray Pickup Laser Beam Paper Flow Signal Flow 2 Technology 37 ...

Page 60: ...roller PCB Reading Sensor 4 lines R G B B W Original size detection Horizontal scanning direction Detection by the Reading Sensor Scanner Unit Vertical scanning direction Detection by the reflection sensor Original Size Sensor AB or Original Size Sensor Inch Basic Configuration Reader Parts Configuration 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 9 10 Key No Name Symbol Function Specification 1 Scanner Unit Image reading an...

Page 61: ...or is used to perform original exposure and reading Light emitted from LED is reflected by the original and reaches the Reading Sensor through the Reflection Mirror and the Lens Unit LED light source Red R line CCD Lens mirror No 4 mirror No 2 mirror No 3 mirror No 1 mirror No 5 Lens Green G line Blue B line Black White B W line LED Lamp Unit The LED Lamp Unit emits light from the 2 LED Lamp PCBs ...

Page 62: ...1 4 decimation Example In the case of magnification 100 the original is read at 260 mm sec Operation description Magnification 25 to 50 50 1 to 199 9 200 to 400 Original reading speed mm sec 260 260 260 Digital magnification processing in the Main Controller PCB 25 to 50 50 1 to 199 9 100 to 200 Original Size Detection Overview This machine determines the size of an original by the combination of ...

Page 63: ... image correction is performed to prevent the dust to be printed on an image This control is performed only when the ADF is being used and has been closed Control timing Dust evasion control At job completion At the start of a job only when one of the following conditions is met At the start of the first job after power ON or recovery from sleep mode At the start of the first job after a message p...

Page 64: ...service mode Adjustment of the image correction level at stream reading COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L1 Adjustment of the dust detection level at stream reading COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L2 Image Processing This machine performs all image processing by the Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB Shading correction Color displacement correction in vertical scanning direction Scanner Unit PCB in th...

Page 65: ...images with green G when the scanned R G and B images are not accurately overlapped at color scanning Example A scanned image of a black line where red R is displaced upward and blue B is displaced downward with respect to green G RORU GLVSODFHPHQW FRUUHFWLRQ LQ YHUWLFDO VFDQQLQJ GLUHFWLRQ 5 RORU GLVSODFHPHQW FRUUHFWLRQ LQ YHUWLFDO VFDQQLQJ GLUHFWLRQ 1 line HIRUH FRUUHFWLRQ IWHU FRUUHFWLRQ As for ...

Page 66: ...2 Disconnection of FFC between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was detected Communication error between the Main Controller PCB and DADF E400 0001 A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected E400 0002 A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected E400 0003 Disconnection of the harness betw...

Page 67: ...ing USB Extension HUB Connection I F RAM for temporarily storage of image data For controller control image processing USB port USB2 0 Device I F USB3 0 Host I F USB2 0 Host I F Hard disk 2 5 inch SATA I F Standard 250 GB 250 GB usable area address book security information password certificate image data preferences Flash PCB Storing System Software TPM PCB Generation and storage of the encryptio...

Page 68: ...r a person is a user or passerby are shown below If a person approaches the machine from the front the sensor judges the person as a user and starts recovery from sleep mode quickly If a person approaches the machine from the side the sensor judges the person walking fast as a passerby and the person walking slowly as a user The machine may recover from sleep mode in response to the detection of t...

Page 69: ...or information about troubleshooting refer to Related error codes major error codes shown below NOTE When system verification at startup is ON startup of system software takes more time than when OFF Settings Registration login as an administrator Management Settings Security Settings System verification at startup Note that when the machine is recovering from sleep mode or at Quick Startup system...

Page 70: ...tdown sequence With this machine the Main Controller PCB detects turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch and the shutdown sequence is started and executed automatically Note that the maximum shutdown time with this machine is 90 seconds If the maximum of 70 seconds has elapsed the power supply is turned OFF by the hardware timer circuit on the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB NOTE If the power supply...

Page 71: ...ethod to realize a compact size This method performs laser scanning using one Scanner Motor and four laser diodes The multifaceted mirror on one Scanner Motor can scan lasers equivalent to four stations thereby realizing space saving The following shows an outline drawing of the Laser Scanner Unit UN08 M01 UN09 1 1 2 4 2 3 No Name 1 Reflection Mirror 2 Imaging Lens 3 Photosensitive Drum 4 BD signa...

Page 72: ...ser Scanner Motor Laser Beam Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN08 C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 ASIC APC signal Mode Laser Status Remarks Forced OFF mode OFF Clears the light intensity setting determined by the APC APC mode ON Adjusts the laser light intensity Print mode ON OFF Emits the laser according to the video signal Standby mode OFF The machine is in standby mode Mode name Standby mode APC mode APC ...

Page 73: ...serves as each color s reference for horizontal scanning With this machine the reference in the horizontal scanning direction for Y and M colors is the right edge right to left while that for C and Bk colors is the left edge left to right Y M color C Bk color Right standard Left standard Feeding direction Y_VDO M_VDO C_VDO Bk_VDO Main Controller PCB UN05 Y Laser M Laser C Laser Bk Laser BD Signal ...

Page 74: ... directions to control the laser beam not to be emitted in non image area Execution timing At power on and at each print Control description Type Control description Mask Width Horizontal scan ning The image mask in the horizontal scanning direction is executed based on the paper size selected by the user Each color s BD signal is the reference 2 mm Vertical scanning The image mask in the vertical...

Page 75: ...eleration signal DEC based on the input timing of the BD signal to control the Scanner Motor rotation speed Y Laser M Laser C Laser Bk Laser BD ACC DEC FG BD Sensor Scanner Monitor C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 Y Mk Laser Driver PCB UN08 ASIC Related error code E100 0001 BD error E110 0001 Scanner Motor error FG lock error at startup E110 0002 Scanner Motor error BD speed lock error at startup E110 0...

Page 76: ...n in angle of the Polygon Mirror facets Execution timing At power on and at each print Control description 1 The Main Controller PCB measures the BD interval after the completion of constant speed rotation control of the Scanner Motor 2 The Main Controller PCB calculates the correction value from the displacement of the BD interval 3 The write start position is corrected by correcting the write st...

Page 77: ...code E100 0001 BD error E110 0001 Scanner Motor error FG lock error at startup E110 0002 Scanner Motor error BD speed lock error at startup E110 0003 Scanner Motor error BD phase lock error at startup 2 Technology 55 ...

Page 78: ... during continuous printing No Transfer method Intermediate transfer ITB ITB Unit Cleaning Cleaning Blade Belt displacement correction Correction by the rib guide mechanism Primary transfer Transfer method Transfer Roller Disengagement mechanism Yes Secondary transfer Transfer method Transfer Roller Disengagement mechanism No Cleaning Static cleaning Separation method Curvature separation Static E...

Page 79: ...eveloping block Development With the dry 2 component AC developing method toner that has been neg atively charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to the Photosensitive Drum 4 Transfer block Primary transfer Toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to the ITB by applying positive charge from the back side of the ITB 5 Secondary transfer Toner on the ITB is transferred t...

Page 80: ...f the Photosensitive Drum Bk M C is removed 7 Cleaning Screw Residual toner is fed M02 Bk Drum_ITB Motor Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum Bk M03 CL Drum Motor Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum Y M C M10 Developing Motor To rotate the Y M C Bk Developing Cylinder and the Developer Feed Screw CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch Y Switching of the drive path to the Developing Unit Y CL02 Developing ...

Page 81: ...raped off to the Waste Toner Container Drum cleaning pre exposure control Purpose The residual charge on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum Bk M C is removed to reduce ghost images etc Control description The Pre exposure LED is activated and light is emitted to the Photosensitive Drum Bk M C Related service mode Activation of the Pre exposure LED COPIER FUNCTION MISC P PRE EXP Setting of the ...

Page 82: ...m code 09 0010 0011 0012 0013 is generated Operation of the host machine If the Drum Unit is detected as absent Message is displayed on the status line of the Control Panel NOTE Detection of presence absence of a Drum Unit may not be executed at times such as at recovery from sleep mode of less than 8 hours Drum Unit Life Detection Purpose To display the LIFE and Remaining Days of the Drum Unit to...

Page 83: ...rum Unit is detected Detected to lo cation Drum Unit New Old Sensor Alarm log dis play location ALARM 3 2 ALARM 3 1 Display timing and or display hide of the advance notice alarm can be changed in the following service modes COPIER OPTION PM DLV M PT DR Y COPIER OPTION PM DLV M PT DR M COPIER OPTION PM DLV M PT DR C COPIER OPTION PM DLV M PT DRM 2 After an advance notice alarm is sent the next adv...

Page 84: ...tive potential Charging method Roller charging DC charging no AC charging The primary charging bias DC negative which has been generated by the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 is applied to the Primary Charging Roller The primary charging bias value is determined by the DC Controller PCB UN049 based on the following conditions Environment humidity detected by the Environment Sensor UN27 L...

Page 85: ...age quality UN049 UN03 DC Controller PCB Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB 1 No Parts name 1 Developing Cylinder Transfer Separation Parts Drive Configuration M02 4 5 3 2 1 No Parts name Role 1 Primary Transfer Roller Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is attracted to the ITB 2 ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner inside the ITB Cleaning Unit is fed 3 ITB Intermediate Transfer Belt Toner on the Photo...

Page 86: ...h speed startup mode At recovery from sleep mode If 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode Automatic adjust ment by switching modes When switching to a col or job from a B W job 100 or more accumulated images of color jobs When sudden environmental changes are detected by the Environment Sensor from when the previous ATVC was executed Automatic adjust ment by replace ment When replacing the Dr...

Page 87: ... when cleaning Control description The secondary transfer bias which has been generated on the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller The secondary transfer bias value is determined by the DC Controller through ATVC control which maintains a constant current value running though the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Related service mode Display of ...

Page 88: ...transitions to Bk mode of the HP state Related error code E074 0001 ITB HP time out error E074 0002 ITB HP time out error Status of each mode timing to enter each mode Mode Status Operation status Bk mode Only the Bk Primary Transfer Roller is engaged Detected by the Primary Transfer Disengagement HP Sensor PS33 At standby During deep sleep At B W printing 1 M08 M08 CL mode All Primary Transfer Ro...

Page 89: ...sm 2 3 4 5 1 No Parts name Role 1 ITB Tension Roller It drives the ITB 2 Reinforcing tape It is used to reinforce the ITB edges to increase the strength 3 Rib It controls displacement of the ITB 4 ITB Belt for performing primary transfer 5 Flange The shape is sloped to prevent the rib from being placed over it ITB Cleaning Purpose To remove residual toner on the ITB to prevent it from affecting th...

Page 90: ...d on the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 2 through the Separation Static Eliminator 1 Residual toner on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is attached to the ITB and then collected by the ITB Cleaning Unit 2 1 Control timing Adjustment timing Condition Automatic adjustment by the output of a specific number of prints When a job starts Eac...

Page 91: ...intenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Clean Inside Main Unit When service mode is executed When FUNCTION CLEANING 2TR CLN is executed Related service mode Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING 2TR CLN Separation Purpose This control separates paper from the ITB by elastic force of the paper Curvature separat...

Page 92: ...er Container is detected UN21 to 24 Toner Density Sensor Y M C Bk Toner carrier ratio in the Developing Unit is detected M04 M05 Bottle Motor YM CK Toner Bottle is rotated M10 Developing Motor The screw inside the Developing Unit is driven Related error code E021 0001 Developing Motor error E021 0002 Developing Motor error E021 0120 Developing Screw rotation detection error Y E021 0220 Developing ...

Page 93: ...ected from the memory Message State Cartridge with wrong item no may be in serted A Toner Container with a wrong item number is inserted Toner cartridge may be malfunctioning A Toner Container that may be malfunctioning is inserted Wrong cartridge color may be inserted A Toner Container of a wrong color is set The correct Toner Container is set Related Alarm Codes Toner memory detection alarm Y 10...

Page 94: ...t by the accu mulation of video count values At job completion For each accumulated video count value of 1500 At paper interval For each accumulated video count value of 3000 At initial installation Power ON At initial installation Control description The toner density of each color is corrected to the target value at the abovementioned control timing and is controlled to achieve an appropriate to...

Page 95: ...r Bk output error E020 01C8 Error in take up of Sealing Member Y E020 02C8 Error in take up of Sealing Member M E020 02C8 Error in take up of Sealing Member C E020 04C8 Error in take up of Sealing Member Bk Toner Supply Control Purpose Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly Control description This machine uses a Toner Container that has an accordion mechanism at the...

Page 96: ... Motor Toner Feed Screw 2 Toner Density Sensor The following shows the image of the Drive Unit viewed from the back side Y M M04 M05 REAR VIEW The operation is going to be explained taking Y and M as an example 1 The motor rotates 2 The driving force is transmitted to the gears and the Toner Bottle rotates Y M M04 M05 REAR VIEW 3 When the motor rotates in the reverse direction the Swing Gear moves...

Page 97: ...he Toner Bottle rotates and toner is supplied Y M M04 M05 REAR VIEW 5 Toner supply starts after the Toner Supply Sensor Y M C Bk PS26 PS27 PS28 PS29 is turned ON Driving the Bottle Motor YM CK M04 M05 rotates the Toner Bottle causing the flag of the Toner Supply Sensor to drop to the 2 Technology 75 ...

Page 98: ... Cut off CAUTION The following warning screen appears when the rotation of toner cartridge has been detected while the front cover is open Related error codes E025 0110 Bottle Motor error Y E025 0120 Bottle Motor error Y E025 0210 Bottle Motor error M E025 0220 Bottle Motor error M E025 0310 Bottle Motor error C E025 0320 Bottle Motor error C E025 0410 Bottle Motor error Bk E025 0420 Bottle Motor ...

Page 99: ...s Monitor Cancel Consumables Remote UI display example Service Mode COPIER COUNTER LIFE TONER Y COPIER COUNTER LIFE TONER M COPIER COUNTER LIFE TONER C COPIER COUNTER LIFE TONER K Status name Low remaining toner in container Toner Container Empty Toner Status Toner Container Low toner remaining Toner Container 0 Alarm code name Toner prior notification alarm 1 4 Toner low alarm 5 Toner Bottle empt...

Page 100: ...e following service mode setting of the ON OFF of toner preparation message COPIER OPTION PM PRE M TONER Y COPIER OPTION PM PRE M TONER M COPIER OPTION PM PRE M TONER C COPIER OPTION PM PRE M TONER K 3 The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes setting of the days left before the Toner Preparation Warning COPIER OPTION PM MSG D TONER Y COPIER OPTION PM MSG D TONER M COPIER ...

Page 101: ...tion each color 10 0100 018x Unidentified Toner Container replacement detection each color NOTE With B W machines screen display alarm code is displayed only for black 1 The display hide setting of the message is available in the following service mode Lv 2 COPIER OPTION USER TNRBRMVR 2 The enable disable setting of the operation suspension is available in the following service mode Lv 2 COPIER OP...

Page 102: ...Feed Unit is comprised of the following parts drive operations Waste toner in the Drum Unit and ITB Cleaning Unit is fed to the Waste Toner Container M03 M02 M17 1 2 3 UN30 SW01 4 No Parts name Role 1 ITB Cleaning Screw Collected toner is fed to the ITB Cleaning Unit 2 Drum Unit Cleaning Screw Residual toner in the Drum Unit is fed 3 Waste Toner Feed Screw Toner collected from the ITB Unit Drum Un...

Page 103: ... alarm 1 Waste Toner Container preparation warning display 2 Waste Toner Container full Waste Toner Container replacement completion alarm Detection timing When Remaining Days until the Waste Toner Container becomes full has reached the setting value 1 When Remaining Days until the Waste Toner Container becomes full has reached the setting value 3 When toner has supplied to the Developing Unit cer...

Page 104: ...o clear the parts counter manually Waste Toner Container is installed The sensor is not detected Waste Toner Container full Error code E013 0001 Waste Toner Feed Motor error Alarm code 11 0001 Waste Toner Container full 11 0010 Waste Toner Container preparation warning display 11 01000 Waste Toner Container replacement completion alarm 11 F010 Waste Toner Container high consumption alarm Service m...

Page 105: ...he control items at each sequence Control tim ing Conditions for execution Type of control Laser power correction control D half con trol ARCDAT control Color dis placement correction control Patch Sen sor adjust ment PASCAL control At power on Normal temperature environ ment Yes High temperature and high humidity environment Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 hours or more have elapsed in high speed startup mode ...

Page 106: ...t Color Mismatch is executed Yes Laser Power Correction D max Control Purpose Determines the optimal laser output Control description 1 The Main Controller PCB forms the patch pattern of the target color on the ITB 2 The DC Controller measures the patch density using the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Front Rear UN46 47 and corrects the laser output for each color to get the target density D half ...

Page 107: ...ked up The difference by comparison is reflected to the D half result as the offset value Color Displacement Correction Control Purpose To correct color displacement caused by uneven exposure skew bent from the Laser Scanner Unit or uneven rotation of the drum ITB Control description Color displacement is corrected by forming a patch for color displacement on the ITB and reading the amount of colo...

Page 108: ... rection Write start correc tion Write start timing in horizontal scanning direction is changed Entire area mag nification ratio correction Pixels in horizontal scanning direction is increased or decreased at the both edges of the image Correction in vertical scan ning direction Write start correc tion Write start timing in vertical scanning direction is changed Image skew cor rection Image data i...

Page 109: ...of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the vertical scanning direction was not found Bk 34 2411 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the horizontal scanning direction was not found Bk 34 5001 The value of the color displacement patch exceeded the upper limit front side 34 5003 The value of the color displacement patch exce...

Page 110: ...h change according to the environment change and deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum Control timing When Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust is being executed Control description 1 When the specified conditions are satisfied the Main Controller PCB prints 3 types of memorized test prints patch pattern 2 Place the test prints in t...

Page 111: ...e To check the status of sensor motor at power on or recovery from sleep mode Control description According to the conditions one of the following 3 patterns of warm up rotation is performed none short or long Condition Pattern Power on Short When the power is turned ON at quick startup High temperature and high humid ity environment None Not a high temperature and high hu midity environment None ...

Page 112: ... Adjust Image Quality Correct Shading Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Clean Inside Main Unit Related error code E012 0001 CL Drum Motor error E012 0002 CL Drum Motor error E012 0003 CL Drum Motor error E020 01A8 Toner Density Sensor Y output error E020 02A8 Toner Density Sensor M ...

Page 113: ...without screws or tools Setting of Fixing Unit sub parts and improved replaceability Fixing Unit sub parts Fixing Film Unit Fixing Pressure Roller and Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support are set as service parts enabling easy replacement Detection of whether the Fixing Unit is new Whether the Fixing Unit is new can be detected Specifications Item Function Method Fixing method On demand fixing Hea...

Page 114: ...engaged with Heater Non paper feed area Installed at the rear side of the host machine Temperature is controlled and temperature at the edge and abnormal temperature increase are detected TH01_03 Sub Thermistor 1 This is engaged with Heater Non paper feed area Installed at the front side of the host machine Temperature is controlled and temperature at the edge and abnormal temperature increase are...

Page 115: ...level and keep it during printing Startup initial rotation temperature control Initial rotation extension temperature control only for media which size in width is wider than 300 mm Print temperature control Paper interval temperature control Down Sequence Control This control is executed to prevent a fixing failure due to temperature increase at the edge or temperature decrease When this control ...

Page 116: ...for print start During print control temperature Fixing temperature STBY INTR PRNT Time Sheet to sheet control temperature Startup warm up rotation control temperature Startup initial rotation Temperature Control A fixing temperature is increased to a printable temperature after receiving a command to start printing Temperature Control by Extended Initial Rotation The control to extend the initial...

Page 117: ...tting of the fixing control temperature Plain 2 tracing paper pre punched paper COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL7 Setting of the fixing control temperature Transparency COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL8 Setting of the fixing control temperature Coated 1 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL9 Setting of the fixing control temperature Coated 2 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB10 Setting of the fixing control temperatu...

Page 118: ...nting of small size paper paper with the width direction length of LTR landscape or less Startup conditions When the temperature detected by the Sub Thermistor 1 TH01_03 or Sub Thermistor 2 TH01_01 has reached a specified temperature or higher during printing Operation The paper interval is increased to lower the temperature and adjust it slightly below the target printing temperature Related serv...

Page 119: ... satisfied The difference between the higher temperature detected by either Sub Thermistor 1 TH01_03 or Sub Thermistor 2 TH01_ 01 and the temperature of the Main Thermistor 1 TH01_02 has become the specified temperature or less A maximum of 30 seconds has elapsed since the preceding sheet passed the fixing nip Film Unit Engagement Disengagement Control Control description The Fixing Film Unit is d...

Page 120: ...unction Purpose When the Fixing Pressure Roller and Fixing Film are continually engaged in the same position for a long time because the machine has been left inactive for an extended period the Fixing Film may become deformed In order to prevent this problem the Fixing Pressure Roller and Fixing Film are rotated for a specified period of time when the machine has been left inactive Operation desc...

Page 121: ... ON for more than the specified period of time Accelerated If the sensor remains OFF for more than the specified period of time Decelerated 3 When the paper trailing edge passes the secondary transfer nip area drive speed of the Fixing Motor drive returns to constant speed 2 1 PS11 Sensor OFF Slack of paper is small Sensor ON Slack of paper is large Values for A4 LTR plain paper The change ratio v...

Page 122: ...abnormal high temperature 0001 Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Necessary 0002 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 high temperature detection error Necessary 0003 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 high temperature detection error Necessary 0004 Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Necessary 0005 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 high temperature detection error Necessary 0006 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 h...

Page 123: ...ng manner to avoid service visits just to clear these errors Error Error Detection First time Second time or later E001 Displayed as E001 error same as before E002 Displayed as 0CF Displayed as E002 error E003 Displayed as E003 error If the above errors occur turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine When the specified number of sheets or more is printed after the first and subsequent err...

Page 124: ...tanaga 3 Kakugata 2 COM10 No 10 Monarch ISO C5 DL Paper Material Thin 52 63gsm Plain 64 105gsm Heavy 106 300gsm Recycled 64 105gsm Coated 106 256gsm Color Tracing paper OHP Envelope Pre punched Bond Postcard Labels Coated 257 300gsm is possible by media adjust kit and service mode setting Coated 257 300gsm and Heavy 257 300gsm SRA3 is not suported Custom size 98 4mm 139 7mm 304 8mm 457 2mm Free si...

Page 125: ...LTR A LTRR G LGL I LGL A FLSP B OFI M OFI E OFI A OFI F4A Paper Material Thin 52 63gsm Plain 64 105gsm Color Recycled 64 105gsm OHP Heavy 106 220gsm Pre punched Bond Envelope Output Capacity 550 sheets 80gsm 640 sheets 64gsm Size Sensor Yes Paper Sensor Yes Parts Configuration Layout Drawing of Rollers 4 1 3 5 20 19 6 7 21 15 17 8 16 22 18 14 13 10 11 12 9 2 No Name 1 Second Delivery Reverse Rolle...

Page 126: ...Cassette 2 Separation Roller 19 Cassette 2 Pickup Roller 20 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 21 First Delivery Roller 22 Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1 2 3 and 4 do not exist if the 3 Way Unit is not installed Layout Drawing of Sensors PS52 PS53 PS12 PS10 PS22 PS08 PS24 PS51 PS14 No Name PS08 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS10 Fixing Outlet Sensor PS12 Reverse Sensor PS14 First Delivery Sensor P...

Page 127: ...d drives When the 3 Way Unit is connected SL06 M12 M14 M13 M07 M11 M30 M09 M31 No Name M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M09 Fixing Motor M11 Duplex Reverse Motor M12 Registration Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor M30 Reverce Motor M31 Second Delivery Motor SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid 2 Technology 105 ...

Page 128: ... M09 SL06 M11 No Name SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M09 Fixing Motor M11 Duplex Reverse Motor M12 Registration Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor 2 Technology 106 ...

Page 129: ...h When the 3 Way Unit D1 is connected Acceleration section Reverse Mouth Reverse Mouth Second Delivery First Delivery Third Delivery Multi purpose Tray Pickup Cassette 2 Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup 2 Technology 107 ...

Page 130: ... Multi purpose Tray Pickup Cassette 2 Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup Acceleration section Cassette Pickup Assembly Parts Configuration 1 PS04 4 8 3 2 PS06 PS05 PS08 PS24 PS07 5 6 7 PS17 M13 PS19 SW13 M06 M07 SW16 SW15 No Name 1 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller 2 Technology 108 ...

Page 131: ...S08 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS24 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor Drive Configuration M06 M07 M13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No Name 1 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 2 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller 3 Cassette 1 Feed Roller 4 Cassette 1 Separation Roller 5 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Roller 6 Cassette 2 Feed Roller 7 Cassette 2 Separa...

Page 132: ...r feed retry error 04 0014 Cassette 4 paper feed retry error Cassette Paper Size Detection Cassette Detection Result of automatic size detection Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer 1 All sizes A B size Inch size A K Size A3 A3 A3 No corresponding size A3 B4 B4 B4 No corresponding size No corresponding size A4R A4R A4R No corresponding size A4R A4 A4 A4 No corresponding size A4 B5R B5R ...

Page 133: ...tches and the width is detected in accordance with the combination of ON OFF When the cassette presence paper size is changed the DC Controller notifies the Main Controller of the status change In addition the distinction between A5 R and STMT R is determined by the user or service technician while that between EXEC and K16 is determined by the service technician Presence of the cassette is detect...

Page 134: ...by the user or service technician while that between EXEC and K16 is determined by the service technician Presence of the cassette is detected when the size switch is pressed When none of the switches are pressed it is judged as no cassette SW15 SW16 4 2 1 3 No Name 1 Trailing Edge Guide Plate 2 Link Arm 3 Side Guide Plate 4 Size Detection Plate SW15 Cassette 2 Size Switch A SW16 Cassette 2 Size S...

Page 135: ...ter control to a position where paper can be picked up When the paper surface is detected lift up operation is stopped the paper level is displayed according to the detection state of the Paper Level Sensor Paper Level Sensor Mounted in the Lifter Unit to detect the paper level in the cassette Calculation is performed according to rotating time of Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor M06 to estimate the timi...

Page 136: ...PS04 PS17 1 1 OFF OFF ON PS05 ON ON ON ON PS05 ON PS05 OFF ON ON PS05 No Name 1 Paper PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A 2 Technology 114 ...

Page 137: ...tection Lever 3 Lifting Plate PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A Cassette 2 PS06 PS07 2 PS19 3 1 No Name 1 Lifter Gear 2 Paper Detection Lever 3 Lifting Plate PS06 Cassette 2 Lifter Sensor 2 Technology 115 ...

Page 138: ...sing PCB M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor Multi purpose Tray Pickup Control Paper is picked up from the Multi purpose Tray by the reverse rotation of the Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor error When an error in the Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 or the Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor PS32 is detected no paper is displayed f...

Page 139: ...Location Location Default setting US Inch size CN A K Size Locations other than above A B size Automatic size detection is performed by three sensors Multi purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB UN29 Detects paper width Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 PS30 Detects paper length Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 PS31 Detects paper length Long Length Paper This machine supports long length pa...

Page 140: ...lex Merging Motor Registration Control Purpose This control corrects paper skew and aligns the leading edge of the paper with that of the image Skew Correction Control The paper leading edge runs into the stopped Registration Roller thereby generating an arch in order to correct the skew Then non stop registration control or stop registration control is executed according to the paper feed conditi...

Page 141: ...ping the feed or stop registration control that temporarily stops paper feed is applied as appropriate Non stop Registration Control Control to align the leading edge of the paper with the leading edge of the image by accelerating or decelerating the feed speed Paper is not stopped temporarily at the registration position which makes it possible to shorten the paper interval between sheets and imp...

Page 142: ...erse Motor 3 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 M30 Reverse Motor 4 First Delivery Roller M31 Second Delivery Motor 5 Third Delivery Roller SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid 6 Duplex Roller 2 7 Duplex Roller 1 When the 3 Way Unit D1 is not connected M11 M09 SL06 3 4 2 No Name No Name 2 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 M09 Fixing Motor 3 First Delivery Roller M11 Duplex Reverse Motor 4 Duplex Roller 1 SL06 Du...

Page 143: ...ition S1 Reverse position and standby position 1 and 2 sided Standby position and stop position Standby position Reverse stop position Symbol At 1 sided feeding At 2 sided feeding Symbol At 1 sided feeding At 2 sided feeding S1 Yes R1 Yes S2 Yes R2 Yes S3 Yes Yes S4 Yes When the 3 Way Unit D1 is not installed When the 3 Way Unit is not installed the short path is the only feed route Standard size ...

Page 144: ...4 Second de livery 1 sheet Short path R1 S1 S2 S3 Third deliv ery Longer than 11 x 17 to 12 x 18 or smaller 432 1 to 457 2 mm First deliv ery 1 sheet Short path R1 S1 S2 S3 Second de livery Third deliv ery Delivery not supported Since the same drive is used for the delivery from the third delivery and the duplex path the productivity is lower than that of the delivery from the first second deliver...

Page 145: ...1 Paper present xx09 PS52 Third Delivery Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P008H bit1 1 Paper present xx0A PS12 Reverse Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P003L bit1 1 Paper present xx0B PS22 Pre Registration Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P006L bit5 1 Paper present xx0C PS11 Arch Sensor Yes P006L bit4 1 Paper present Yes Detected No Not detected xx 01 delay 02 stationary 07 wrapped around the Fixing Roller 0A power ON 0B...

Page 146: ...e Color Large Print Full Color Sin gle Color Small 1 1 US 101 108 229 230 321 322 000 000 UL model Type 2 Total 2 Total Black 2 Copy Full Color Sin gle Color Large Copy Full Color Sin gle Color Small Print Full Color Sin gle Color Large Print Full Color Sin gle Color Small 1 1 US 102 109 229 230 321 322 000 000 General model Total 1 Total Black 1 Copy Print Full Color Large Copy Print Full Color S...

Page 147: ...l Full Color Sin gle Color Large Total Full Color Sin gle Color Small 1 1 1 CN 101 112 113 122 123 000 000 000 1 Hidden by default Can be changed in service mode Description of symbols Large Large size paper when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction Small Small size paper when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction Total When a sheet of paper is delivered the counter...

Page 148: ...When detected by the Second Delivery Reverse Sensor PS51 Third Delivery Tray When detected by the Third Delivery Sensor PS52 2 When the Finisher is in stalled Finisher When detected by the Entrance Sensor S1 In the case of installing the 3 Way Unit D1 Fan Control Location of Fans FM01 FM02 FM03 FM04 No Name Function Error codes FM01 Front Fan Cools paper delivered from the first delivery and secon...

Page 149: ...assette Heater host machine Prevents paper in the Cassettes 1 2 from absorbing moisture Cassette Heater Cassette Pedestal Prevents paper in the Cassettes 3 4 from absorbing moisture Reader Heater Prevents condensation on the Scanner Unit and the Reading Glass Inside Heater Prevents condensation inside the machine Conditions when each heater is turned ON The heaters work as shown below when the Deh...

Page 150: ...ile only all night power is supplied When any of the following Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep applies transition to this mode does not occur Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode Check Items Settings of Settings Registration When the following settings are enabled in the Settings Registration menu the machine does not enter Deep Sleep mode The corresponding items are shown below Pref...

Page 151: ...te for approx 10 minutes after startup in many cases Quick Startup To realize faster startup power configuration has been changed to always supply power to the Main Controller PCB at quick startup Consequently the main menu can be displayed faster than the normal startup Even when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF power is supplied to the following PCBs Quick startup setting ON Quick startup set...

Page 152: ...on status of the hardware A coin vendor is connected Either of the following network settings is set to ON Settings Registration Preferences Network AppleTalk Settings Use AppleTalk ON Slect Wired Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Slect Wired Wireless LAN Wired LAN Wireless LAN Bluetooth Settings ON When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power in any of the conditions bel...

Page 153: ...Periodical Service 3 Consumable Parts List 132 Cleaning Parts 136 ...

Page 154: ...180 000 pa ges Replacement 2TR ROLL 43 0359 3 Developing Unit Y FM1 B264 1 240 000 im ages Replacement DV UNT Y 43 0120 4 Developing Unit M FM1 B265 1 240 000 im ages Replacement DV UNT M 43 0121 5 Developing Unit C FM1 B266 1 240 000 im ages Replacement DV UNT C 43 0122 6 Developing Unit Bk FM1 B267 1 240 000 im ages Replacement DV UNT K 43 0123 7 Drum Unit Y 1 Replacement PT DR Y 43 0070 Alarm l...

Page 155: ...omer environment operation conditions in the field etc 3 The default value of respective service mode varies according to the operation of sales company Follow the instruction of the sales company on switching the service modes and or implementing service parts Single Pass DADF B1 No Name Parts number 1 Quantity Estimated life 2 Work de scription Service Mode Alarm Code Parts counter COUNTER DRBL ...

Page 156: ... COUNTER DRBL 1 2 Replacement completion 1 Pickup Roller Unit FM1 D470 1 80 000 pages Replacement DF PU RL 43 0091 2 Separation Roller FM1 D471 1 80 000 pages Replacement DF SP RL 43 0092 3 Stamp FB5 9410 1 7 000 pages Replacement STAMP 4 Left Hinge FE3 5484 1 150 000 times Replacement DF HNG L 1 The parts number may be changed due to engineering change 3 Periodical Service 134 ...

Page 157: ...t timing is a reference value in the case of usage in general offices and the actual value differs depending on the customer environment operation conditions in the field etc Inner Finisher K1 There is no comsumable parts Booklet Staple Finisher AA1 There is no comsumable parts 3 Periodical Service 135 ...

Page 158: ...Cleaning Parts 15 9 14 13 8 4 16 17 5 3 6 7 1 2 12 10 11 15 16 3 Periodical Service 136 ...

Page 159: ... with lint free paper moistened with alcohol As needed 3 Pre transfer Guide 4 Secondary Transfer Roller Guide Assembly 5 Registration Roller 6 Registration Assembly 7 Vertical Path Roller 8 Duplex Roller 1 9 Duplex Roller 2 10 First Delivery Roller 11 Second Delivery Roller 12 Third Delivery Roller 13 Rowel Block Assembly 14 Tray Duct Assembly Lower 15 Copy Board Glass Both side 16 Stream Reading ...

Page 160: ...ce 139 Parts Replacement Procedures List 140 Parts List 142 External Cover Interior System 154 Original Exposure System 176 Controller System 185 Laser Exposure System 198 Image Formation System 201 Fixing System 242 Pickup Feed System 249 ...

Page 161: ...g the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached be sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the new part Points to Note when Tightening a Screw For reduction in weight thin plates are used in some parts of this...

Page 162: ...moving the HDD on page 185 Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 191 Removing the DC Controller PCB on page 194 Removing the Fax Unit on page 194 Removing the Controller Fan on page 196 Laser Exposure System Laser Exposure System on page 49 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit on page 198 Cleaning the Dustproof Glass on page 199 Image Formation System Image Formation System on page 201 Removing the ...

Page 163: ...g the Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller on page 250 Removing the Right Door Unit on page 252 Removing the First Delivery Unit on page 255 Removing the Second Delivery Unit on page 257 Removing the Third Delivery Unit on page 258 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit on page 258 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit on page 260 Removing the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Unit Option on page 261 Removing t...

Page 164: ... Cover 6 Reader Rear Cover 7 Reader Hinge Lower Cover Right 8 Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box 9 Reader Front Cover Small 10 Reader Front Cover Small 11 Reader Front Cover 12 Right Front Upper Cover 13 Front Cover Upper 14 Front Cover 15 Cassette1 Front Cover 16 Cassette 2 Left Cover 17 Waste Toner Assembly Cover 18 Handle Cover 19 Service Book Holder 20 Left Cover Lower 21 Blind Cover 22 Left Cov...

Page 165: ...ivery Tray Support Plate 6 Inner Delivery Cover 7 Inner Cover Right Upper 8 Reverse Trailing Edge Guide 9 Reverse Guide Cover 10 Inner Right Cover 11 Inner Blind Cover 12 Fan Holder 13 Front Inner Upper Cover 14 Drum Unit Retaining Cover Bk 15 Drum Unit Retaining Cover C 16 Drum Unit Retaining Cover M 17 Drum Unit Retaining Cover Y 18 Front Inner Lower Cover 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 143 ...

Page 166: ... Host Machine Control Panel 1 2 3 No Parts Name No Parts Name 1 Control Panel Upper Cover 2 Control Panel Cover Lower 3 Control Panel Cover Rear 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 144 ...

Page 167: ...Power Supply Cord Cover 8 Environment Heater Switch Cover 9 Connector Cover 10 Handle Cover 11 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 12 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray 13 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Tray Assembly 14 Right Cover Lower 15 Right Door Lower 16 Right Cover Front Lower 17 Right Cover Front Upper 18 Main Power Supply Switch Cover 19 Right Door 20 Third Delivery Outlet Cover 21 Read...

Page 168: ...t CBk M06 Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor Lifter Drive Unit M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M08 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor Main Drive Unit M09 Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit M10 Developing Motor Main Drive Unit M11 Duplex Reverse Motor Reverse Duplexing Drive Unit M12 Registration Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor M17 Waste Toner Feed Motor M3...

Page 169: ...1 FM02 FM03 FM05 No Parts Name Main Unit FM01 Front Fan Front Fan Unit FM02 Power Supply Cooling Fan Power Supply Fan FM03 Motor Fan FM05 Controller Fan Main Controller PCB 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 147 ...

Page 170: ...tion Patch Sensor Unit SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid First Delivery Unit CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch Y Main Drive Unit CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch M Main Drive Unit CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch C Main Drive Unit CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch Bk Main Drive Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 148 ...

Page 171: ...heater Fixing Unit H02 Cassette Heater Cassette Heater Unit H03 Inside Heater Inside Heater TH01_01 Main Thermistors 1 Fixing Unit TH01_02 Sub Thermistors 2 Fixing Unit TH01_03 Sub Thermistors 1 Fixing Unit TP01 Fixing Temperature fuse Fixing Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 149 ...

Page 172: ... Release Sensor First Delivery Unit PS14 First Delivery Sensor First Delivery Unit PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS20 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS22 Pre Registration Sensor Shutter Registration Unit PS24 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Unit PS33 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor M...

Page 173: ...2 Interlock Switch 1 Front Fan Unit SW03 Interlock Switch 2 Front Fan Unit SW04 Main Power Supply Switch SW10 Dehumidification Switch SW11 Right Door Open Close Detection Switch SW12 AC Interlock Switch SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch SW15 Cassette 2 Size Switch A SW16 Cassette 2 Size Switch B SW26 Front Door Switch Front Upper Inner Cover Unit SW27 Right Upper Door Open Close Detection Switch 4 Parts...

Page 174: ... High Voltage PCB UN03 High Voltage Power Supply PCB UN04 DC Controller PCB UN05 Main Controller PCB UN07 AC Driver PCB Low Voltage Power Supply Unit UN14 Pre exposure LED PCB M Pre exposure LED Unit UN15 Pre exposure LED PCB C Pre exposure LED Unit UN16 Pre exposure LED PCB Bk Pre exposure LED Unit UN47 Wireless LAN PCB 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 152 ...

Page 175: ...UN29 Multi purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit UN31 Fixing Fuse PCB Fixing Unit UN67 1st Line Modular PCB FAX Unit SP1 FAX Speaker FAX Unit UN18 Control Panel CPU PCB Control Panel 1 Control Panel Speaker Control Panel 2 Control Panel KEY PCB Control Panel 3 NFC PCB Control Panel 4 Device Port LED PCB 5 Motion Sensor 6 FAX 1st Line PCB FAX Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cle...

Page 176: ... direction in the figure below to fully open it 1 3 2 CAUTION Moving the Lever Assembly to the following position changes the open close status of the host machine s Right Door A Position that opens the host machine s Right Door B Position that fully opens the host machine s Right Door A B A B Removing the Front Door 1 Open the Front Door 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 154 ...

Page 177: ...ion 1 Open the Front Door Removing the Front Door on page 154 2 Fully open the Right Door Fully open the Right Door on page 154 3 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 242 4 Remove the Drum Unit Bk Procedure 1 Remove the Right Front Upper Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 1 3 2 2 1x 1x 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 155 ...

Page 178: ... the Inner Right Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 3 Pull out the cassette 1 and open the Right Cover Front Upper 2 2 Screws 3 2x 3 1 2 4 Remove the connector 1 of the Front Fan 1x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 156 ...

Page 179: ...nector 2 2 Screws 3 1 Claws 4 2x 3 1 4 1x 1x 2 6 Remove the Front Fan 1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Procedure 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 1 Screw 1 1 Connector 2 1x 1x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 157 ...

Page 180: ...r Supply Cooling Fan 3 1 Boss 1 2 Hooks 2 1 2 3 CAUTION Be sure to insert the A part of the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 to the guide 2 for installation of the fan 1 2 A Removing the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB Preparation 1 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 158 ...

Page 181: ...uide 3 1x 1 2 3 1x 2 Remove the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 from the guide 2 Screws 2 5 Claws 3 4 Bosses 4 5x 4 4 3 1 2x 3 3 3 2 CAUTION A connector is connected in the back of the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 159 ...

Page 182: ...en installing the PCB be sure to fi it with the 4 claws on the bottom side NOTE Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position Removing the Motor Fan Preparation 1 Remove the Cassette Connector Cover 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 160 ...

Page 183: ...3 Claws 1 4 1 3 2 1 1x 3x Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Motor Fan Removing the Motor Fan on page 160 Procedure 1 Remove the Harnesses around the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 11 Wire Saddles 1 1 Edge Saddle 2 12x 1 1 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 161 ...

Page 184: ...ors 1 11x 1 1 1 1 3 Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 1 2 Screws 2 2x 2 2 1 Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Preparation 1 Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit on page 161 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 162 ...

Page 185: ...t Plates 1 and the grounding 2 3 Screws 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 1 3 4 2 3 3x 1x 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 from the guide 3 Screws 4 7 Claws 2 6 Bosses 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 7x 4 4 2x 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 163 ...

Page 186: ...isconnect the 2 connectors 2 and remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 2 Connectors 2 2x 1 2 NOTE Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 164 ...

Page 187: ...Removing the Control Panel Procedure 1 Open the ADF 1 Front Cover 2 and Right Door 3 1 2 3 2 Remove the Right Front Upper Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Hooks 3 2x 2 2 1 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 165 ...

Page 188: ... Raise the Control Panel 1 and remove the Reader Front Cover 2 2 Rubber Caps 3 2 Screws 4 2 Hooks 5 3 4 5 1 2 4 3 2x 5 Remove the Control Panel Cover Rear 2 Rubber Caps 2 2 Screws 3 2x 1 2 3 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 166 ...

Page 189: ... 1 Wire Saddle 2 1 Reuse Band 3 2x 1 3 2 7 Remove the 3 Harnesses 3 4 Wire Saddles 2 2 2 1 4x 8 Place a sheet of paper 1 on the Copy Board Glass to prevent damage from the Control Panel 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 167 ...

Page 190: ...ver the Control Panel 1 and put it on the Copy Board Glass Place a sheet of paper on the Copy Board Glass to prevent damage from the Control Panel 2 Hooks 2 2 2 1 11 Remove the Control Panel Connector Cover 1 8 Hooks 2 2 2 2 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 168 ...

Page 191: ...12 Remove the Harness 1 Connector 1 1x 1 13 Remove the Cable Holder 1 1 Boss 2 3 Hooks 3 1 2 3 3 14 Disconnect the cables 2 Connectors 1 1 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 169 ...

Page 192: ...trol Panel Rear Cover 4 Rubber Caps 2 6x 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 16 Turn the Control Panel Rear Cover 1 to remove the Control Panel Left Hinge 2 2 Screws 3 2x 2 3 3 1 17 Remove the Control Panel Rear Cover 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 170 ...

Page 193: ...ON Check the position of the Boss 3 for slip resistance when attaching the Ground Wire 1 19 Remove the Control Panel Right Hinge 1 2 Screws 2 2x 2 2 1 20 Remove the Harness 3 Wire Saddles 1 3 Connectors 2 3x 3x 2 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 171 ...

Page 194: ...anel Removing the Control Panel on page 165 Procedure 1 Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB 1 2 Flat Cables 2 6 Screws 3 2x 6x 2 1 2 3 3 Actions after Replacement Perform Touch Panel adjustment by simultaneously pressing the service mode top screen Settings Registration button 5 button three times 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 172 ...

Page 195: ...CB Removing the Control Panel on page 165 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface A of the Touch Panel and the surface B of the LCD Unit when disassembling assembling B A 1 Pass the harness 1 through the A part and remove the Control Panel Stay Unit 2 8 Screws 3 8x 2 3 1 3 3 A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 173 ...

Page 196: ...2 Remove the Numeric Keypad PCB 1 3 Wire Saddles 2 Guide A 1 Screw 3 1x 4x 1 2 A 2 3 3 Remove the LCD Holder 1 3 Screws 2 3x 1 2 4 Remove the Control Panel Keys 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 174 ...

Page 197: ...placement Perform the following adjustment when replacing the Touch Panel and the LCD Unit Perform Touch Panel adjustment by simultaneously pressing the service mode top screen Settings Registration button 5 button three times 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 175 ...

Page 198: ...e the Copy Board Glass 2 2 Screws 3 2x 1 2 3 CAUTION Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts 1 of the Reader Scanner Unit If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 3 Move the Belt 1 to move the Reader Scanner Unit 2 to the cut off part 3 of the Reader Scanner Unit 2 2 1 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 176 ...

Page 199: ...Loosen the 1 Screw 1 Remove the Belt 3 from the pulley while releasing the Tensioner 2 1x 2 3 1 6 Pick up the Reader Scanner Unit 1 and remove the Belt 2 2 1 CAUTION Do not pull the Reader Scanner Unit or the Flat Cable 1 may be damaged 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 177 ...

Page 200: ... the sheet of half folded A4 paper 1 1 2 8 Remove the Flat Cable 2 and the Protection Sheet 3 from the Reader Scanner Unit 1 Connector 1 1 Flat Cable 2 1 Protection Sheet 3 4 Guides A 4x 1x A A 1 3 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 178 ...

Page 201: ...page 282 NOTE Actions after replacing the Scanner Unit also can be adjusted on the situation mode below SITUATION Parts Replacement Adjustment during Scanner unit replacement Removing the Reader Flat Cable Preparation 1 Remove the Reader Scanner Unit Removing the Reader Scanner Unit on page 176 2 Remove the Cover Rear Upper Procedure 1 Remove the Controller Cover 2 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 1 ...

Page 202: ... Harness Guide 2 3 Connectors 3 9x 3x 2 3 1 4 Remove the Reader Connection Plate 1 2 Screws 2 2x 2 1 5 Put the Reader Flat Cable from the hole 1 on the Reader and Remove it from the Guide Guide 2 1x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 180 ...

Page 203: ...emove the Protection Sheet 1 2 Guides 2 2 Claws 3 3 2 1 2x 7 Remove the double sided tape 1 fixing the Reader Flat Cable 1 8 Remove the Reader Flat Cable 1 Guide 1 1x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 181 ...

Page 204: ... Flat Cable 1 to the reader side and attach it to the guide 1 1x 2 Attach the Reader Flat on the Cable through the hole 1 on the reader flame 2 1 1x 3 Attach the Reader Connection Plate 1 2 Screws 2 2 1 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 182 ...

Page 205: ...PCB 3 Connectors 3 2 1 9x 3x 3 5 Attach the Reader Cable Cover 1 3 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 3x 3 3 1 2 6 Attach the Controller Cover 7 Attach the Cover Rear Upper 8 Fold the Reader Flat Cable as shown below and connect it to the Reader Scanner Unit 9 Install the Reader Scanner Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 183 ...

Page 206: ...CAUTION When the distance of differences between A and B is over 1 0mm adjust the distance under 1 0mm while removing the double sided tape When fixing the Reader Flat Cable with the distance of differences between A and B is over 1 0mm it may occur disconnection of the Reader Flat Cable 1 A B 11 Attach the protection sheet 1 2 Guides 2 2 Claws 3 3 2 1 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 184 ...

Page 207: ... Removing the HDD Preparation 1 Back up the necessary data based on the table shown below 2 Printing the set registered data COPIER FUNCTION MISC P USER PRT COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT In case the backup fails print it out or export it to a USB 3 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 5 Remove the Controller Cover Removing the Controller Cover on page 185 4 Parts Replac...

Page 208: ...ting Yes 3 Yes 8 Yes 9 Button information in Quick Menu Yes 3 Yes 8 Yes 9 Restrict Quick Menu Yes 3 Yes 8 Yes 9 Setting items for Main Menu Button settings in Main Menu Yes 9 Button settings on the top of the screen Yes 9 Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Yes 9 Other settings for Main Menu Yes 9 Box settings Mail Box Settings Box Name PIN Time Until File Auto De lete Print Files Upon Storing from Pr...

Page 209: ...it Log Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported 7 Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings 8 Download mode 5 Backup Restore 3 MEAP Backup Meapback bin Backup is possible using SST or USB memory The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function 9 For detail a...

Page 210: ... Procedure 1 Remove the 4 cables 4 Connectors 1 3 Wire Saddles 2 3x 4x 1 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 188 ...

Page 211: ...2 Remove the HDD Unit 1 3 Hooks 2 1 Screw 3 1x 2 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 189 ...

Page 212: ... in safe mode and format all partitions using SST or a USB memory USB memory 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format SST Mode List Single Format hard disk Execute Format 2 Turning OFF and ON the main power switch 3 Restoring the backup data 4 Resetting registering the data Refer the setting data printed out at the preparation list reset register the data 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 190 ...

Page 213: ... page 185 Procedure CAUTION Do not transfer the following parts to another host machine whose serial number is different The host machine does not start up normally and may become unrecoverable in some cases Main Controller PCB with the Memory PCB unremoved FLASH PCB TPM PCB Memory PCB 1 Remove the Reader Cable Cover 1 3 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 3x 3 3 1 2 2 Remove the 3 Flat Cables 1 from the Harness G...

Page 214: ...s 2 2x 2 1 4 Remove the Cable Holder 1 and disconnect the harnesses from left side of the Main Controller PCB Unit 2 Hooks 2 3 Connectors 3 3x 2 1 2 3 5 Remove all Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 2 2 Edge Saales 3 7x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 192 ...

Page 215: ...2 1 Wire Saddle 3 2 Reuse Bands 4 4 3 4 3x 14x 1 2 1 1 1 1 7 Remove the Flat Cable Guide 1 1 Boss 2 1 Hook 3 3 2 1 8 Remove the 2 Screws 2 and remove the Main Controller PCB Unit 1 2 Screws 2 2 Hooks 3 3 2 2 3 2x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 193 ...

Page 216: ...R FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 Remove the Connector Cover 3 Remove the Cover Rear Lower Procedure 1 Remove the DC Controller PCB 1 27 Connectors 6 Screws 27x 6x 1 Actions after Replacement 1 Restore the Service Mode data on the following service mode Lv 2 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES ACTIVE is displayed at execution and then OK is displayed about 2 minutes later Restoration is complete 2 If upload...

Page 217: ... Procedure 1 Disconnect the connector 3 Wire Saddles 1 1 3x 2 Disconnect the cable 1 Edge Saddle 2 3 Connectors 2 2 1 3 1x 3x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 195 ...

Page 218: ...Hooks 3 2 1 2 3 3 2x Removing the Controller Fan Preparation 1 Remove the Controller Cover Removing the Controller Cover on page 185 Procedure 1 Remove the 4 fixing pins 1 1 from the Controller Fan 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 196 ...

Page 219: ...s 2 1 from rear side of the Controller Fan CAUTION Put the Controller Fan in direction of the wind 1 to the heat sink Install the Controller Fan on the heat sink with keep inserting position of the fixing pin 2 2 as shown below 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 197 ...

Page 220: ...edure 1 Grasp and lift up the handle 1 to release the protrusion 2 and pull out the Laser Scanner Unit 3 to the position in the following figure 1 Clamp 4 2 Screws 5 2x 1 2 3 4 5 1x 2 Turn over the Protection Sheet 1 and free the harness 2 from the Harness Guide 3 1 Connector 4 3 Disconnect the Flexible Cable 5 1x 2x 1 4 3 5 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 198 ...

Page 221: ...t disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment Actions after Replacement 1 Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch 2 If the degree of color displacement differs between the center and the edge execute copy ratio correction and distortion correction as needed Cleaning the Dustproof Glass 1 Open the Front Cover 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 199 ...

Page 222: ... Insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 1 into the hole 2 and clean the glass by moving it back and forth 2 to 3 times in the A part 1 1 2 2 A CAUTION Do not insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool upside down 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 200 ...

Page 223: ...er Roller isl not be disengaged When removing the Drum Unit Bk be sure to do so after returning the machine to a standby state 1 Open the Front Door 2 Open the Drum Unit Retaining Cover 1 CAUTION The illustration is explaining by using the Drum Unit Y as a reference Be sure to check the Drum Unit type to remove before starting the work 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 201 ...

Page 224: ...the Drum Unit Y as a reference Be sure to check the Drum Unit type to remove before starting the work 1 A Removing the Developing Unit Preparation CAUTION If you perform work while in Deep sleep mode or when the power was turned OFF while in Deep sleep mode the Primary Transfer Roller will not be disengaged When removing the Drum Unit Bk be sure to do so after returning the machine to a standby st...

Page 225: ...isconnect the connector 2 and hook it on the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover 3 1 Connector 2 1x 1 2 2 3 1x 3 Remove the Developing Unit 1 while lifting it up 1 Installing the Developing Unit 1 Unpack the new Developing Unit NOTE Remove the seal from the supply mouth in step3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 203 ...

Page 226: ...N If the Developing Unit is installed with toner uneven in the container the screw may be broken and E020 E021 error may occur 3 Remove the seal 1 from the supply mouth 1 4 Check that the connector is hooked on the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover If it is not hooked the connector may get stuck when inserting the Developing Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 204 ...

Page 227: ...he figure below CAUTION Take care to prevent the connector of the Developing Unit from getting caught 6 Disconnect the connector 1 from the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover and connect it to the Developing Unit 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 205 ...

Page 228: ...w while holding it down 1 Screw 1 1 9 Install the Drum Unit Install the Drum Unit The following procedure can also be performed in Service Model SITUATION Parts Replacement Adjustment during Developing Unit replacement 1 Clear each initialization operations and the parts counters COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C COPIER FUNCTION INST...

Page 229: ...OPIER ADJUST DENS D Y LVL COPIER ADJUST DENS D M LVL COPIER ADJUST DENS D C LVL COPIER ADJUST DENS D K LVL 3 Check the Service Mode and write the setting values on the service label of the Front Cover COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT Y COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT M COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT C COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT K 4 Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Removing the Waste Toner Container 1 Open the Casse...

Page 230: ...ration alarm is displayed NOTE Replacing the Waste Toner Container after the preparation warning has been displayed clears the parts counter automatically COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 WST TNR Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1 Open the Right Door 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 208 ...

Page 231: ...aced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 2TR ROLL Removing the ITB Unit Preparation CAUTION If the ITB Unit is replaced in sleep mode or the power is turned OFF in sleep mode the Primary Transfer Roller is not disengaged and the ITB Unit can not be pulled out Set standby mode to replace the ITB Unit 1 Fully open the Right Door Fully open the Right D...

Page 232: ...ll the ITB Unit 2 to the position in the figure below while shifting it to the left side 1 A 2 2 Pull the lever 1 to unlock it grasp the handle A on the left and right and pull the ITB Unit 2 to the position in the figure below while shifting it to the left side B 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 210 ...

Page 233: ...elow while shifting it to the left side Left Side Align the triangle mark in the guide on the left with that in the ITB Unit place the shaft A of the ITB Unit 1 on the rail B of the guide and install the unit while shifting it to the left A B NOTE When the consumable parts have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR UNIT When TR UNIT i...

Page 234: ...ean the leading edge 4 of the Pre transfer Cover Sheet with lint free paper CAUTION Do not use alcohol because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window Do not use alcohol because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window After cleaning execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch 2 2 3 3 1 4 Cleaning the Light Guide Clean the upper surface 1 of the Lig...

Page 235: ...have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 T CLN BD It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the ITB Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade on page 212 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning ...

Page 236: ...uide using the clasp 2 3 Hooks 3 1 2 3 3 2 Stand the ITB Unit and secure it by using the ITB Cleaning Blade 1 as a base 1 Boss 2 1 2 3 Remove the screw 1 and remove the Left Handle 3 by rotating it while lifting up the boss 1 Screw 1 1 Boss 2 1x 1 3 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 214 ...

Page 237: ...When installing removing the Left Handle align the holes 1 and 2 in a straight line 1 2 When installing removing the Left Handle align the holes 1 and 2 in a straight line 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 215 ...

Page 238: ...nsion Roller Retainer 1 2 Hooks 2 1 2 CAUTION When installing the Tension Roller Retainer do so in the order of 1 spring 2 rib and 3 Shaft Hole 5 Remove the ITB Tension Roller 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 216 ...

Page 239: ...een replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR BLT It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Primary Transfer Roller Y M C BK Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Unit Removing the ITB on page 213 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 217 ...

Page 240: ...sfer Roller 1 1 NOTE When the consumable parts have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR ROLK COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR ROLC It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Patch Sensor Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleanin...

Page 241: ...ooks 4 2x 2x 1 3 4 2 2 Remove the Patch Sensor Unit 1 2 Protrudes 2 2 Bearings 3 2 Bosses 4 1 2 3 4 2 4 3 Adjustment after Replacement The following procedure can also be performed in Service Mode SITUATION Parts Replacement Adjustment During Patch Sensor Unit Replacement 1 Enter the value shown on the label included in the package COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA F COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA R 4 Parts Re...

Page 242: ...ove the Left Cover Upper 6 Remove the Left Cover Assembly Rear 7 Remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan on page 157 Procedure 1 Lift up the A part of the lever to release the claw 1 and remove the Waste Toner Drive Assembly 2 1 Claw 1 1 Connector 3 2 Screws 4 2 Hooks 5 2x 1x 1x 3 4 2 A 1 5 NOTE When the consumable parts have been replaced be sure to clear the par...

Page 243: ...move the white member 1 using a flat blade screwdriver 1 Claw 2 1x 1 2 2 Remove the Duplex Merging Motor 1 and the Registration Motor 2 2 Connectors 3 4 Screws 4 4x 2x 3 3 2 1 4 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 221 ...

Page 244: ...ts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 REG DR U Removing the Main Drive Unit Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Pull out the Drum Unit by approx 30mm 30mm 3 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Main Controller PCB Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 191 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 222 ...

Page 245: ... Procedure 1 Remove the DC Controller PCB Unit 1 12 Wire Saddles 27 Connectors 3 Screws 25x 12x 3x 1 2 Remove the Main Drive Unit 1 9 Screws 2 9x 1 2 2 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 223 ...

Page 246: ...t Rear Plate Hook Controller Box Low Voltage Power Suppy Unit Main Drive Unit 1 Release the hook of the Main Drive Unit from the Rear Plate 2 Pull out the Main Drive Unit approx 10 mm horizontally 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 224 ...

Page 247: ... Unit 4 Remove the Developing Unit 5 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 6 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 7 Remove the Main Controller PCB Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 191 8 Remove the Main Drive Unit Removing the Main Drive Unit on page 222 9 Remove the Motor Fan Removing the Motor Fan on page 160 10 Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit on page 161 ...

Page 248: ... are equipped with the Lifter Drive Unit by specification the operation is not different 2 cables are equipped with the service part of the Lifter Drive Unit Connect 1 of them as shown in the figure 1x 2x 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 226 ...

Page 249: ...2 3 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 227 ...

Page 250: ... 1 Remove the Main Controller PCB Removing the Main Controller PCB on page 191 2 Remove the Main Drive Unit Removing the Main Drive Unit on page 222 Procedure 1 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 2 Wire Saddles 3 3x 3 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 228 ...

Page 251: ...llowing service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P PRE EXP 2 Enter the value shown on the label included in the package in the following service mode COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP M COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP C COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP K 3 Write the setting values set at step 2 on the service label in the Front Cover Remove the Bottle Drive Unit YM CBk Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Unit Removing the ...

Page 252: ... Delivery Tray CAUTION Be sure to place a sheet of paper during the work to prevent the drum from being exposed to light and damaged Procedure 1 Free the harness 1 of the Toner Bottle Mount Y and C only 1 Connector 2 2 Wire Saddles 3 2x 1x 2 1 1 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 230 ...

Page 253: ...model perform one of the following operation Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Upper 1 Y M C 2 Hooks 2 1 Boss 3 2 3 1 2 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Upper 1 BK 2 Hooks 2 1 Boss 3 1 2 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 231 ...

Page 254: ...1 3 2 2x 4 Depending on the model perform one of the following operation Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit YM 5 Connectors 1 2 Wire Saddles 2 1x 5x 1 1 2 Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit CK 4 Connectors 1 4x 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 232 ...

Page 255: ...acing the Bottle Drive Unit Removing the Waste Toner Gear Holder Preparation NOTE If waste toner has overflowed onto the Intermediate Guide this waste toner can be fed into the Waste Toner Container by operating the Waste Toner Feed Motor M17 COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR 14 1 Remove the Left Cover Upper 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 233 ...

Page 256: ...e Waste Toner Gear Holder 1 1 Claw 2 2 Hooks 3 3 Bosses 4 3 4 3 2 4 1 1x CAUTION Hang the hook A on the upper side of the Waste Toner Gear Holder onto the edge B of the plate to secure it 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 234 ...

Page 257: ...o check that there is no gap between the Waste Toner Gear Holder and the mounting parts Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit Preparation 1 Fully open the Right Door of the host machine 2 Remove the ITB Unit 3 Pull out the Cassette 1 4 Remove the Waste Toner Container 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 235 ...

Page 258: ...emove the First Delivery Tray 11 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount 12 Remove the Intermediate Guide 13 Remove the Waste Toner Gear Holder 14 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 15 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 16 Remove the Main Drive Unit Procedure 1 Remove the Drum Unit Retaining Cover 1 1 Claw 2 for each 1 2 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 236 ...

Page 259: ...Delivery Tray 1 2 Protrusions 2 for each 2 1 2 3 Remove the Drum Rail Units 1 and free the harness 2 from the guide only for Bk 1 Screw 3 for each 1 Screw 4 for each 4x 4x 1x 2 1 1 3 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 237 ...

Page 260: ...Remove the Developing Stay Units 1 1 5 Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit 1 2 Hooks 2 1 2 CAUTION When removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit be careful not to turn it over 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 238 ...

Page 261: ...7 COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR 14 1 Fully open the Right Door 2 Remove the ITB Unit 3 Remove the Front Cover 4 Remove the Toner Bottle 5 Remove the Drum Unit Y 6 Remove the Developing Unit Y 7 Remove the Left Cover Upper 8 Remove the First Delivery Tray 9 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Procedure 1 Remove the Right Front Upper Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 1 3 2 2 1x 1x 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cle...

Page 262: ...tle Motor 1 1 CAUTION When installing the links of the Bottle Motor be sure to pinch the Lock Arm 1 1 3 Remove the Front Inner Upper Cover 1 2 Screws 2 1 Connector 3 3 Wire Saddles 4 2x 1 2 3x 1x 3 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 240 ...

Page 263: ...4 Remove the Front Inner Lower Cover 1 4 Screws 2 4x 1 2 2 5 Remove the Intermediate Guide 1 1 Screw 2 1 Hook 3 1x 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 241 ...

Page 264: ... UNIT is cleared FX LW RL FX UP FR FX LW BS are also cleared at the same time The parts counter of the Fixing Unit is automatically cleared when a new Fixing Unit is detected CAUTION When fixing errors E001 E002 E003 occur close the Right Door and turn ON the main power Removing the Fixing Film Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 242 Procedure 1 Remove the Fi...

Page 265: ...1 2 Claws 2 1 2 2x 3 Rotate the Fixing Unit 180 degrees 4 Remove the Fixing Right Cover 1 2 Claws 2 CAUTION Do not remove the cover abruptly as the harnesses are connected inside the cover 2 1 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 243 ...

Page 266: ...5 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 3 Connectors 1 1 1 3x 6 Rotate the Fixing Unit 90 degrees 7 Open the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 244 ...

Page 267: ...8 Remove the 2 springs 1 from the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers 1 9 Return the Fixing Pressure Lever 1 1 10 Open the Fixing Lower Cover 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 245 ...

Page 268: ...le parts have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UP FR It is also cleared at the same time when FX UNIT is cleared Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support Preparation 1 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 242 2 Remove the Fixing Film Unit Removing the Fixing Film Unit on page 242...

Page 269: ... Procedure 1 Open the guide 1 1 2 Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller 1 1 3 Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 247 ...

Page 270: ...open the Right Door on page 154 2 Remove the Fixing Unit Removing the Fixing Unit on page 242 3 Remove the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Unit on page 209 4 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 5 Remove the Second Delivery Unit Removing the Second Delivery Unit on page 257 6 Remove the First Delivery Unit Removing the First Delivery Unit on page 255 Procedure 1 Remove the Air Flow Duct 1 2 Claws 2 2x 2 1 ...

Page 271: ...re 1 Move the Pickup Guide Holder 1 1 2 Pull out the Pickup Roller 2 Feed Roller 3 and Separation Roller 4 while holding down the claw 1 3 Claws 1 1 3 2 4 1x NOTE When the consumable parts have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 Cx PU RL COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 Cx FD RL COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 Cx SP RL COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 Cx PU RL COPIE...

Page 272: ...ove the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover 1 1 Claw 2 2 Bosses 3 3 1 2 1x 3 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 1 and the Feed Roller 2 1 2 4 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Guide 1 1 Hook 2 2 Claws 3 installed on the host machine 2 1 3 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 250 ...

Page 273: ...install it from the front side NOTE When the consumable parts have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode SERVICE MODE COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 M PU RL SERVICE MODE COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 M SP RL SERVICE MODE COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 M FD RL M PU RL M SP RL M FD RL is also cleared at the same time when R DOOR is cleared 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 251 ...

Page 274: ... first and then fit part 2 with the 3 bosses and 1 claw Removing the Right Door Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Cassette 1 2 2 Open the Right Door Right Door Lower Cassette Right Door Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 6 Remove the Right Cover Front Lower and Right Door Lower 4 Parts ...

Page 275: ... Tray 5 2 4 3 Procedure 1 Remove the Wire Fixation Member 1 1 Claw 2 3 Hooks 3 1 2 3 3 1x 2 Free the wire 2 from the Wire Fixation Member 1 and pass it through the hole A in the Right Door 1 2 2 2 A A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 253 ...

Page 276: ...rt the Right Door with your thigh and taking care to prevent it from falling 1x 1 2 3 7 Pull the Right Door Link Left 1 and Right Door Link Right 2 towards the outside to remove them while bending the A part at the position in the following figure 1 Remove the link by pulling the Lever Assembly Front 1 toward the outside at the position A of the Stopper Rail and opening the door 4 Parts Replacemen...

Page 277: ... the outside at the position B B B A 8 Remove the Right Door 1 2 Bosses 2 1 2 2 NOTE When the consumable parts have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 R DOOR REG RL M PU RL M SP RL M FD RL is also cleared at the same time when R DOOR is cleared Removing the First Delivery Unit Preparation 1 Fully open the Right Door Fully open the Rig...

Page 278: ...ery Unit on page 257 Procedure 1 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 2 3 1 4 2x 1x 2 Remove the First Delivery Unit 1 1 Screw 2 2 Bosses 3 1x 1 2 3 CAUTION If you overly pull out the right side of the First Delivery Unit the 2 bosses may be damaged 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 256 ...

Page 279: ...pen the Right Door 2 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper Procedure 1 Pull out the Second Delivery Unit 4 Screws 1 Wire Saddle 4x 1x 2 Pull out the Second Delivery Unit and disconnect the connector 1 Connector 1 1x 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 257 ...

Page 280: ...damaged Removing the Third Delivery Unit 1 Fully open the Right Door Fully open the Right Door on page 154 2 Remove the Third Delivery Unit 3 Bosses 3 Protrusions 5 Screws 5x Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Right Door Unit Removing the Right Door Unit on page 252 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 258 ...

Page 281: ...e Right Door Link Left 1 and Right Door Link Right 2 1 2 2 Remove the Connector Cover 1 1 Claw 2 1 Hook 3 2 3 1 1x 3 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 2 3 1 1x 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 259 ...

Page 282: ...t Support Block 1 on the left side 1 A 2 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Cassette 1 2 2 Open the Right Door Right Door Lower Cassette Right Door Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 260 ...

Page 283: ...p Unit Option Preparation 1 Pull out all of the cassettes 2 Open the Right Door Right Door Lower Cassette Right Door Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 6 Remove the Right Cover Front Lower and Right Door Lower 7 Remove the Cassette Cover Right Front 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 261 ...

Page 284: ...e Cover Right Rear and remove the Cassette Right Door 9 Remove the Cassette Right Cover Lower 7 9 8 6 3 5 4 Procedure 1 Release the connector 1 of the Harness Guide 2 Connectors 1 2x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 262 ...

Page 285: ...ve the Pickup Unit 1 4 Screws 2 1 1 2 2 4x Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller Preparation 1 Remove the Registration Guide Unit Removing the Registration Guide Unit on page 269 Procedure 1 Remove the Guide Plate 1 2 Screws 2 Use a stubby screwdriver 2x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 263 ...

Page 286: ...s 1 upward 1 3 Lift up the left bushing 1 and remove the Shaft Spacer 2 CAUTION Be careful not to drop off the Shaft Spacer 2 1 2 CAUTION Be sure to push the Shaft Spacer from above all the way down 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 264 ...

Page 287: ...Roller as rolling speed is controlled by the roller consumable amount Marked part must be located on the right side as shown in the figure when installing the roller NOTE When the consumable parts have been replaced be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 VP FD RL VP FD RL is also cleared at the same time when R DOOR is cleared 4 Parts Replacement and C...

Page 288: ...n the Right Door on page 154 Procedure 1 Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Retainer 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 Release the protrusion by bending the hook 1 on the Secondary Transfer Guide 1 3 Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit 2 Protrusion 2 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 266 ...

Page 289: ...4 Remove the gear 1 1 Claw 2 1x 2 1 5 Remove the E ring 1 1 6 Remove the Registration Roller 1 1 7 Remove the Spacer Right 1 and Spacer Left 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 267 ...

Page 290: ...e time when R DOOR is cleared NOTE When installing the Secondary Transfer Guide 1 Align the 4 ribs 1 of the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit with the Registration Roller 2 2 Fit the 2 protrusions 3 of the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit to the springs 4 3 3 4 4 2 1 3 Install the 2 protrusions 1 on the front side into the holes 2 of the guide Be sure that the rib A is located inside the Secondary Transf...

Page 291: ...age 154 2 Remove the Front Cover Removing the Front Door on page 154 Procedure 1 Remove the right side of the Registration Guide Unit 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 Insert screwdrivers into the hole 1 and then release the claw 3 from the Registration Guide Unit 2 1 Claw 3 2 1 1x 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 269 ...

Page 292: ... 2 protrusions and pull out the Registration Guide Unit 2 CAUTION Be careful of the connector on the back 2 1 4 Disconnect the connector 1 1 Connector 1 1 Wire Saddle 2 1x 1 2 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 270 ...

Page 293: ...Adjustment 5 Pickup Feed System 272 Document Exposure System 275 Actions after Replacement 277 ...

Page 294: ...OPIER TEST PG PG PICK each paper source CAUTION When image is printed by 2 sided print 1st side is printed up side of the paper and 2nd side is printed down side of the paper When checking the leading edge margin on the 1st side check the margin in up side of the paper on the rear side from the feed direction CAUTION If the margin is not within the standard values Adjust the image position of each...

Page 295: ... Adjustment Plate is moved toward the left on the machine by 1 tooth the left edge margin is increased by 0 5mm Scale Teeth 5 Tighten the fixation screw NOTE A step may occur between the cassette when the adjustment plate is moved Loosen the 2 screws to adjust the step on both side of the cassette front cover 5 Adjustment 273 ...

Page 296: ...e COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG THCK 1 2 speed front side COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG DUP2 1 2 speed back side Leading edge margin is increased or decreased 0 1mm by 1 setting value 2 Left Edge COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1 C2 C3 C4 MF front side COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1RE C2RE C3RE C4RE MFRE back side Left edge margin is increased or decreased 0 1mm by 1 setting value 3 When the service setting ...

Page 297: ...FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES NOTE When changing the service mode setting values it is recommended to back up in the above service mode Performing backup makes the work easier when replacing the Scanner Unit etc When Clearing the Reader Related RAM Data CAUTION Before performing the RAM clear execute the following procedure Be sure to output the P PRINT COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT Back up the servic...

Page 298: ... CCD W PLT Y COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Z COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR R COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR G COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR B COPIER ADJUST CCD 100 RG COPIER ADJUST CCD 100 GB COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST PY2 COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST PM2 COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST PC2 COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST PK2 FEEDER ADJUST LA SPEED FEEDER ADJUST DOCST 5 Print out the P PRINT on the following service mode and check that t...

Page 299: ...Y ADJ X ADJ Y STRD POS ADJ X MG ADJ Y DF ADJY DF2 ADJ S COPIER ADJUST CCD SH TRGT DFTBK R DFCH R2 DFCH2R2 W PLT X DFTBK G DFCH R10 DFCH2R10 W PLT Y DFTBK B DFCH G2 DFCH2G2 W PLT Z DFTBK BW DFCH G10 DFCH2G10 DFTAR R 100 RG DFCH B2 DFCH2B2 DFTAR G 100 GB DFCH B10 DFCH2B10 DFTAR B 100DF2RG DFCH K2 DFCH2K2 DFTAR BW 100DF2GB DFCH K10 DFCH2K10 MTF M1 MTF S1 MTF2 M1 MTF2 S1 MTF M2 MTF S2 MTF2 M2 MTF2 S2 ...

Page 300: ...ox 2 minutes OK is displayed If necessary output the service values by P PRINT before execution COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 After the above execution is completed turn OFF the main power supply After Replacement 1 Restore of the Service Mode data on the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES ACTIVE is displayed at execution and then OK is displayed about 2 minutes later Restor...

Page 301: ...form a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm 4 Write the service setting values on the service label in the front cover Pre Exposure LED Unit 1 Light up the Cleaning Pre exposure LED and check that the LED lights up on the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P PRE EXP 2 Enter the service mode values written on the label included in the package COPIER ADJUST EXP LED INTEXP M COPI...

Page 302: ...C MC YC KR MR YR Distortion Correction Vertical Scanning Direction 1 Clear the offset value of distortion correction on the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT V 2 Output PG for adjustment COPIER TEST PG TYPE 61 COPIER TEST PG PG PICK Select the paper source where A4 or LTR size paper or larger is loaded 5 Adjustment 280 ...

Page 303: ...IER FUNCTION INSTALL RDSHDPOS 3 To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STRD POS 4 Execute white level adjustment Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper 1 Place the paper on the Copy Board Glass COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 2 Place the paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL2 3 Place the paper on the Copy Board Glass COPIER FUNCTION C...

Page 304: ...ent Pickup Tray COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL4 3 Calculate the MTF filter coefficient COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC 4 Enter the service setting values written on the service label inside of the Reader Front Cover COPIER ADJUST 100DF2RG COPIER ADJUST 100DF2GB2 COPIER ADJUST DFTBK G COPIER ADJUST DFTBK B COPIER ADJUST DFTBK R COPIER ADJUST DFTBK BW DADF AV1 Scanner Unit 1 Input the service label value b...

Page 305: ...D W PLT X COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Y COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Z W PLT X W PLT Y W PLT Z 2 Adjust the shading position COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RDSHDPOS 3 Set the target value of B W shading COPIER FUNCTION CCD BW TGT 4 Adjust the white level Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper 1 Set a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 2 Set a sheet of paper on the ADF Document P...

Page 306: ...Troubleshooting 6 Initial Check 285 Test Print 286 Troubleshooting Items 291 Debug Log 304 ...

Page 307: ...ower plug remains connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level 10 If a transparency is used check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manu...

Page 308: ...da tions Yes Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 5 Full half tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 7 For R D 8 Half tone Patch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 For R D 10 MCYBk horizontal stripes sub scan ning direc tion Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 11 For R D 12 MCYBk 64 gradation Yes Yes Yes Main control ler PCB 13 For R D 14 Full color 16 grada tion Yes Yes...

Page 309: ...lure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging occurs on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit White line Check that white line does not appear on entire image Failure of Drum Unit Uneven density at front rear Check that uneven density does not appear at front rear Failure of Drum Unit Full half tone TYPE 5 This test print is for mainl...

Page 310: ...nit Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on laser light path Uneven pitch Check that uneven pitch does not appear on entire image Failure of Drum Unit Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on entire image Dirt on Dustproof Glass Deterioration of ITB Grid TYPE 6 This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement right angle accuracy and straight line accurac...

Page 311: ...otosensitive Drum Dirt on Primary Charging Roller White line Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of ITB Unit Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on Laser Light Path 64 gradations TYPE 12 This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations de...

Page 312: ...ethod Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in each color Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Gray balance Check that density is even in each color on gray scale area Failure of Drum Unit 6 Troubleshooting 290 ...

Page 313: ...294 Display of Non Canon Product Message Display of Non Canon Product Message on page 299 The ITB Unit Cannot Be Removed Due to a Disengagement Error of the Primary Transfer Roller Location ITB Unit Cause Condition When an unexpected situation or unexpected combination of conditions occurs a Primary Transfer Roller disengagement error may occur This may result in the ITB Unit not being able to be ...

Page 314: ...sed A 5 Remove the Drum Unit 6 Remove the ITB Unit Forcible stop of paper feed Function Overview Forcibly stop the paper at a specified position Next time a job occurs the paper is forcibly stopped at the stop position leading edge shown in the figure 6 Troubleshooting 292 ...

Page 315: ...ion is executed the setting to forcibly stop the paper becomes disabled Unfixed toner may be attached depending on the stop position Use caution when handling it How to use Use this function from SITUATION mode Service Mode SITUATION Troubleshooting Forcible stop of paper feed The following service modes can be operated from this SITUATION mode COPIER TEST P STOP PRINTER COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER...

Page 316: ...ry 1st side 2 Yes Yes 41 Second Delivery 2nd side 1 2 Yes Yes 70 Reverse position 1 1 4 Yes Yes Yes 71 Reverse position 2 1 3 Yes Yes Yes 72 Duplex standby position 1 Yes Yes Yes 99 Pre fixing 1st side when checking the image Yes 1 Paper is stopped when a duplex job is executed paper is stopped after being reversed 2 Paper may not stop depending on the setting of delivery outlet 3 Way Unit D1 shou...

Page 317: ...e rear side and the image on the front side shrinks a If the front side is higher paper on the front side proceeds more smoothly than the rear side and the image on the front side enlarges b Execute fixing alignment adjustment so that the height at the front and the height at the rear of the Fixing Unit become the same Servicing works 1 Open and lift up the Right Door 1 slide the Right Door Guide ...

Page 318: ...e power was turned OFF while in sleep mode the Primary Transfer Roller will not be disengaged therefore the machine needs to be returned to standby state before removing the Drum Unit Bk Since there is a risk of damaging the Photosensitive Drum do not touch the surface Be sure to block light to the removed Drum Unit using paper otherwise it will be exposed to light 5 Remove the Control Panel Lower...

Page 319: ...6 Remove the Delivery Outlet Side Cover 1 1 Screw 2 7 Pull out the Cassette 1 1 and open the Cassette Side Cover 2 2 Screws 3 8 Disconnect the connector 1 of the Front Fan 6 Troubleshooting 297 ...

Page 320: ...9 Open the Front Fan 1 and disconnect the connector 2 2 Screws 3 1 Claw 4 10 Remove the Front Fan 1 6 Troubleshooting 298 ...

Page 321: ...Plate A and the Adjustment Plate B downward for the same divisions of the scale a REAR FRONT REAR FRONT b c 12 Install the parts in the reverse order from step 10 to step 1 13 Output the image where the symptom occurred and check that the symptom does not occur If the symptom persists check for other factors Display of Non Canon Product Message The following shows the remedy to be performed when a...

Page 322: ... Chart 1 Turn OFF the main power E602 0801 Cannot access the hard disk If the optional removable hard disk is use check it is connected then restart the machine IF this is error tou occur content your service representative Display Sample If an error code is displayed on a black screen Execute a remedy described in service mode by referring to Error Jam Alarm in the Service Manual If an error code...

Page 323: ...ed process and turn OFF the power 10 Replace related parts Initialization and or inspection fails and related parts are replaced Confirmation or judgment Detail change of initialization and or Inspection Automatic process of the machine 7 Scheduled process is conducted Flow Chart 2 CAUTION Numbers in the Flow Chart 2 are corresponding to the procedure numbers Check the remedy procedure by referrin...

Page 324: ...needs to be entered in two digits even the number to be specified is one digit Enter 01 to specify 1 and enter 04 to specify 4 For example in the case of the above display E602 0801 specify No 8 because Partition No 8 is in error Enter the number as 08 If you made a mistake press 1 again then enter two digits number 6 Specify and schedule the process stated as a remedy for error code by referring ...

Page 325: ...N Replacing HDD without canceling the schedule causes the scheduled process is executed to replaced HDD at the next normal startup When replacing parts specify 4 to cancel the schedule 10 Refer to the Service Manual to replace the related parts NOTE Related parts for E602 Harness between main controller PCB and the HDD HDD Main Controller PCB Related parts for E614 Flash PCB Main Controller PCB 6 ...

Page 326: ...settings the settings need to be changed according to the trouble that occurs and the situation Types of Debug Logs Types of Debug Logs Description Sublogs Manual logs Logs collected in each module and controller are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed Logs of the Main Controller RCON and DCON are saved together with automatic logs as up to 10 logs in total Automatic logs Log...

Page 327: ... s key operation logs in order to distinguish between a host machine failure and a user s operation mistake when for example a fax transmission error occurred If it cannot be denied the possibility that the user operation caused the error collect the key operation logs Key operation logs are not recorded by default therefore the function needs to be enabled In order to save key operation logs conf...

Page 328: ... request the Support Dept of the sales company to issue a license CAUTION When collecting network packet logs using this function be sure to obtain user s permission in advance by explaining about it CAUTION In the case of a heavy load network environment some of the packets may be left uncollected 6 Troubleshooting 306 ...

Page 329: ...r just finished occurring See Case D of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case B of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case C of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case D of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case A of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs Does the problem repeat restart Does the problem cause the Control Panel to be locked Network packet logs need to be collected Key operatio...

Page 330: ...Logs on page 313 3 Save and collect reports by referring to Saving and Collecting Reports on page 314 4 Collect debug logs by referring to Collection of Log on page 315 Case D Problem when execut ing a job Example Printing is not per formed etc Not necessary 1 Execute log saving while the problem is occurring by referring to Sav ing of Manual Logs Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs on page...

Page 331: ...the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Board is required When restart is repeated When all the operations of the device are frozen and manual logs cannot be collected When the machine would not recover from sleep mode Refer to the following regarding installation on to the Controller PCB DEBUG SRAM PCB Reference example of installation Work Flow The flow of saving collecting Sublogs is shown below 1 Preparation...

Page 332: ...formation helps to find the operation log where the problem occurred When R D reproduces the failure it is necessary to use information such as the procedure used by the customer frequency of use and job data at the time of occurrence of the failure 6 Remove the board installed in step 1 and return the settings back to the original values Preparation Follow the procedure shown below to make prepar...

Page 333: ... collected triggered by occurrence of an unexpected error occurrence of an error code or restart of the machine If you want to change the triggers change the setting in the following service mode COPIER Function DBG LOG LOG TRIG However there is no need to change the setting unless otherwise instructed by the Support Dept of the sales company The events that trigger collection of automatic logs an...

Page 334: ...again Behavior when HDD reaches the limit When this setting is enabled setting value 1 the following behaviors will occur when the HDD reaches the limit When overwrite setting is ON The oldest packet file is deleted This oldest file is judged not by the date and time allocated to the file but by the last update time of the file If the HDD reaches the maximum size while retrieving packets the oldes...

Page 335: ...unction is enabled only packet data that includes the machine s MAC address in the packet header is captured Setting the startup collection function 1 To enable this function set 1 in the following service mode Lv 2 COPIER TEST NET CAP PONSTART 0 Not automatically collect at startup factory default setting 1 Data is filtered If this function is enabled only packet data that includes the machine s ...

Page 336: ...twork packet logs have been collected and necessary network packets have been captured stop the capture from the following menu Settings Registration Preferences Network Store Network Packet Log When this setting is disabled all the service mode settings configured in step 3 are initialized After completion of analysis of the network trouble be sure to disable the network capture function It is th...

Page 337: ... USB Device To save collect Sublogs to a USB device perform the procedure shown below to collect the logs If SST is used to save collect Sublogs to a PC this work is not necessary CAUTION If the log is stored multiple times to the USB flash drive on the host machine with the platform version 3 6 or earlier make sure to move the stored log file to a different location each time Log files are stored...

Page 338: ...e date and time at which the symptom was reproduced is within the period of Continuous Log Example When the symptom was reproduced at 9 40 on April 14 2017 and a manual log was saved Check that the manual log that was generated at 9 40 on April 14 2017 is displayed under Event Logs Check whether 9 40 on April 14 2017 is included in the logged period from 8 03 33 on March 22 2017 to 9 45 14 April 1...

Page 339: ...clog bin 100 102 20170322 0954 48 ZZZ00000 2512 clog bin 101 102 20170322 0848 16 ZZZ00000 2512 clog bin 102 102 20170322 0803 33 ZZZ00000 2512 clog bin Sub log full Download OK Please press any keys Do not turn OFF the power without Saving to a PC with SST installed Follow the procedure shown below to save collect Sublogs to a PC using SST If a USB device is used to save collect Sublogs this work...

Page 340: ...ick at Log to expand the tree and check that there are continuous logs date_model number_clog bin 5 Select the data to upload and click Start Select the check box on the left of Log and click the Start button It is not necessary to select MeapBack bin and SramImg bin because they are not necessary for analysis 6 Enter a file name arbitrary and click the SAVE button to save the file to the PC 6 Tro...

Page 341: ...he symptom occurred is included in the logged period Date and time in the log file name represent those of when the log collection is started There are files with dates before the symptom occurs Storage locations of log files Storage locations of log files are shown below When using USB device Root folder of the USB device When using SST PC s C ServData model name serial number folder How to check...

Page 342: ...s have been stored in this binary file is described in LOGLIST TXT stored in the log file storage location Open this file to check the manual logs and automatic event logs CAUTION If a manual log was saved when the symptom was reproduced check that a log with the date and time immediately after the reproduction is included If there is no log file collected immediately after the symptom was reprodu...

Page 343: ...folder and check that two types of files have been saved a plaintext file which file name starts with NC and ends with cap and a ciphertext file which file name starts with NC and ends with can Report files Report files saved to the USB device are stored in the folder under the name shown below where the firmware is stored Serial No SP Date year month day hour minute 12 digits L Service Mode Relat...

Page 344: ... after completion of trouble investigation Operations required Execute this service mode when resetting the settings related to debug logs during investigation of log collection and perform the operation again However note that the log files automatically saved to the debug log save area in the controller are kept within the range not exceeding the upper limit If you want to delete the saved logs ...

Page 345: ...Error Jam Alarm 7 Outline 324 Error Code 328 Error Code FAX 466 Alarm Code 469 Jam Code 517 ...

Page 346: ...000 in 2 to 4 digit is not used Thus an error code is described as EXXX using 5 to 7 digit in the service manual e g E012 E000012 Location Code The error codes and jam codes of this machine contain information on the location The location information is displayed in 2 digits and has the meaning shown below On the error and jam display screens the location code is shown in the L column Device JAM E...

Page 347: ...sette 1 02 Cassette 2 03 Cassette 3 04 Cassette 4 05 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Assembly F0 2 sided Pickup size When a jam occurs a paper size is displayed The row displaying SIZE on the jam screen refers to the paper size Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters some paper size names are omitted The following is the list of displayed row of texts and corresponding paper sizes The ...

Page 348: ...nment LEGAL I C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government LETTER I C6 ISOC6 IND LGL India LEGAL I C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10 I SRA3 SRA3 DL DL J B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2 J B1 JISB1 E_C3 Nagagata 3 J B2 JISB2 E_C4 Nagagata 4 J B3 JISB3 E_C5 Nagagata 5 J B4 JISB4 E K2 Kakugata 2 J B5 JISB5 E_K3 Kakugata 3 J B6 JISB6 E_K4 Kakugata 4 J B7 JISB7 E_K5 Kakugata 5 K16 K16 E_K6 Kakugata 6 K8 K8 E_K7 Kakugata 7 ND PCD Newdry Postca...

Page 349: ... accordance with the configuration of the options of the host machine and requests from the user When clearing MN CON while any login application other than User Authentication is error such as not displayed login screen occurred In this case access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error co...

Page 350: ...he Fixing Unit Fixing Unit Fixing Drive Unit DC Controller PCB Power Supply Unit Fixing Motor M09 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so ...

Page 351: ...ing Unit Fixing Unit Fixing Drive Unit DC Controller PCB Power Supply Unit Fixing Motor M09 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the da...

Page 352: ...r PCB J505 Harness between the AC Driver PCB and the Fixing Unit Fixing Unit Power Supply Unit DC Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the ...

Page 353: ...C Driver PCB J505 Harness between the AC Driver PCB and the Fixing Unit Fixing Unit Power Supply Unit DC Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data aft...

Page 354: ...lthough the Fixing Relay was not turned ON Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB J115 and the AC Driver PCB J505 Power Supply Unit DC Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be prot...

Page 355: ...up COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E009 0001 05 Fixing disengagement timeout error Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor did not detect OFF status within 10 sec after the start of fixing disengagement operation Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN049 J119 and the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor PS1...

Page 356: ...ION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E010 0002 05 Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be maintained although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts Harness between the Bk Drum ITB Motor and the DC Controller PCB Bk Drum Unit 0313 0000 ...

Page 357: ...ent so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E012 0001 05 CL Drum Motor error Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although have passed from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts Harness between the CL Drum Motor and the DC Controller PCB Y D...

Page 358: ...fter the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E012 0003 05 CL Drum Motor error Detection Description There was no FG signal input from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts Harness between the CL Drum Motor and the DC Controller PCB Y Drum Unit 0310...

Page 359: ...fore replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E014 0001 05 Fixing Motor error Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although have passed from the startup of the Fixing Mo...

Page 360: ...lace the DC Controller PCB b If the measurement value is 1 ohm or higher non conduction state replace the Power Supply Unit E014 0003 05 Fixing Motor error Detection Description There was no FG signal input from the startup of the Fixing Motor Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN049 J123 and the Fixing Motor M09 Fixing Unit Gears in the Fixing Unit Cam 21T Gear 36T Gear Fi...

Page 361: ...roperly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Replace the Developing Unit 9 Replace the Drum Unit ...

Page 362: ...ck if the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB is properly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Re...

Page 363: ...ion of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Check the disconnection of the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB Harness Connector 9 Check the disconnection of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Harness Connector 10 Replace the Developing Unit 11 Replace the...

Page 364: ...ng Unit Harness Connector 2 Check if the Developing Unit is properly installed 3 Check if the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB is properly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness ...

Page 365: ...ck if the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB is properly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Re...

Page 366: ...ion of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Check the disconnection of the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB Harness Connector 9 Check the disconnection of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Harness Connector 10 Replace the Developing Unit 11 Replace the...

Page 367: ... is properly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Replace the Developing Unit 9 Replace the Drum ...

Page 368: ...3 Check if the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB is properly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector...

Page 369: ...nnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Check the disconnection of the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB Harness Connector 9 Check the disconnection of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Harness Connector 10 Replace the Developing Unit 11 Replac...

Page 370: ...s properly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Replace the Developing Unit 9 Replace the Drum Un...

Page 371: ...heck if the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB is properly installed engagement of the Fixing Claw lifting of the PCB 4 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 5 Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 ...

Page 372: ...ction of the Main Controller PCB Harness Connector 6 Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 7 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 8 Check the disconnection of the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB Harness Connector 9 Check the disconnection of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Harness Connector 10 Replace the Developing Unit 11 Replace t...

Page 373: ...CTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E021 0002 05 Developing Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be maintained although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Developing Motor Remedy Related parts Main Drive Unit Harness between the Developing Motor M10 and the DC Controller PCB Power Supply Unit Developin...

Page 374: ... order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the disconnection of the Developing Unit M Harness Connector 2 Remove the Developing Unit and check if you can rotate the coupling of the Developing Unit by hand If it is too heavy to rotate replace the Developing Unit 3 Replace the Main Drive Unit 4 Replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the...

Page 375: ...sor Y PS26 Bottle Drive Unit YM DC Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check if the Toner Bottle Y is properly inserted into the main machine 2 Remove the Toner Bottle Y shake it 10 times up and down with the end Pump Unit side facing upward and then insert it into the main machine again 3 Check the Harness Connector among the DC C...

Page 376: ...rotected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E025 0210 05 Bottle Motor error M Detection Description The Toner Supply Sensor M did not detect change for 1 5 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor YM was rotated at toner supply Remedy Related parts Harness between the Bottle Motor YM and the DC Controller PCB Harness between the Toner Suppl...

Page 377: ...r M The recovery sequence was repeated with no toner in the container In platform V3 6 and later error caused by this event will not occur Remedy Related parts Toner Bottle M 1051 0000 Bottle Drive Unit YM Developing Unit M 0321 0000 ITB Rail Assembly Rear Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check if the Toner Bottle M is properly inserted into t...

Page 378: ...ntroller PCB 6 Check the Bottle Drive Unit CK 7 Replace the Bottle Drive Unit CK Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E025 0320 05 Bottle Motor error C Detection Descripti...

Page 379: ...o be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E025 0410 05 Bottle Motor error Bk Detection Description The Toner Supply Sensor Bk did not detect change for 1 5 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor CK was rotated at toner supply Remedy Related parts Harness between the Bottle Motor CK and the DC Controller PCB Harness between the Ton...

Page 380: ...er Container Bk The recovery sequence was repeated with no toner in the container In platform V3 6 and later error caused by this event will not occur Remedy Related parts Toner Bottle Bk Bottle Drive Unit CK Developing Unit Bk ITB Rail Assembly Rear Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check if the Toner Bottle Bk is properly inserted into the ma...

Page 381: ...the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the value of the following service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS P B P C If the value is less than 115 perform Procedure 2 If the value exceeds 1000 perform Procedure 5 2 Check the Registration Patch Sensor Unit window and clean it with a blower if it is soiled If the dirt still remains wipe the window in one direction with ...

Page 382: ...oid SL2 operation 5 Check the Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Registration Patch Sensor Unit 6 Replace the Registration Patch Sensor Unit 7 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEV...

Page 383: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E064 1201 05 High voltage error Detection Description Remedy Related parts Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB DC Controller PCB Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the H...

Page 384: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E064 1301 05 High voltage error Detection Description Remedy Related parts Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB DC Controller PCB Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the H...

Page 385: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E064 1401 05 High voltage error Detection Description Remedy Related parts Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB DC Controller PCB Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the H...

Page 386: ...ror is not cleared in Procedure 2 replace the DC Controller PCB and check the operation of the main machine Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E073 0001 05 Interlock err...

Page 387: ...ings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch a 3 If the error still occurs after replacing the ITB Unit perform Procedure b to check the Main Drive Unit b If it makes disengagement operation b 1 Check the Main Drive Unit by rotating the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Coupling by hand at least once b 1 1 If it does not rotate smoothly replace the ...

Page 388: ...istration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch a 3 If the error still occurs after replacing the ITB Unit perform Procedure b to check the Main Drive Unit b If it makes disengagement operation b 1 Check the Main Drive Unit by rotating the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Coupling by hand at least once b 1 1 If it does not rotate smoothly replace the Main Dri...

Page 389: ...rrect Color Mismatch Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E110 0002 05 Scanner Motor error Detection Description The speed was not locked by BD control within specified pe...

Page 390: ...connection 2 Visually check that the harness is not caught or open circuit 3 If there is any error replace the corresponding harness cable Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRA...

Page 391: ...ication error Detection Description Although access to the SCNR EEPROM from the DC Controller PCB CPU was performed 3 times no response was received and timeout occurred Remedy Related parts Laser Scanner Unit DC Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 2 Check the disc...

Page 392: ...ng in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the disconnection of the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Harness Connector 2 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 3 Replace the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 4 Replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup ...

Page 393: ...ation COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E197 0B21 05 Serial communication error Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Cassette Unit PCB was detected Remedy Related parts Cassette Pedestal Driver PCB DC Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the disconnection of the Cassette Pedest...

Page 394: ...ckup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E197 1081 05 Serial communication error Detection Description A communication error between the CPU of the DC Controller PCB and KONA1 ASIC in the DC Controller PCB was detected An error caused by software Remedy Related parts DC C...

Page 395: ...Power Supply Unit Harness Connector 3 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 4 Replace the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 5 Replace the Power Supply Unit 6 Replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIE...

Page 396: ...ing COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW SELF CHK to 1 it is handled as an error E199 0203 05 Error in high voltage sequence C Detection Description Error for collecting log Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW SELF CHK to 1 it is handled as an error E199 0204 05 Error in high voltage sequence K Detection Description Error for col...

Page 397: ...OPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E202 0004 04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error Detection Description Home position error of the Reader Scanner Unit was detected when reading of a job was completed Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J7005 and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_ A1 J5002 Harness between the Main Controller...

Page 398: ...dy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When an error is detected conduction of 24 V is stopped At power check check if 24 V is conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to...

Page 399: ...Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E240 0005 00 Controller communication error Detection Description A sequence error with the controller occurred Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN049 J110 and the Main Controller PCB UN05 J4511 DC Controller PCB UN049 Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in t...

Page 400: ...LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E246 0001 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company ...

Page 401: ...er PCB UN05 Remedy Check replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E248 0010 04 EEPROM error Detection Description The Main Contr...

Page 402: ...t was detected at power on Remedy Related parts Power Supply Unit DC Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness Connector 2 Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness Connector 3 Replace the Power Supply Unit 4 Replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing ...

Page 403: ...PIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E280 0102 04 Communication error Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was detected Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the ADF Driver PCB ADF Driver PCB Main Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harnes...

Page 404: ...e to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E302 0101 04 Error in paper back white shading Detection Description An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value out of specification was detected Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the ADF Driver PCB ADF D...

Page 405: ...y Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Install the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive 2 Check replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTI...

Page 406: ...PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Install the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive 2 Check replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER...

Page 407: ...E350 0003 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E350 3000 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E351 0000 00 System error Detection Description Main Controller PCB communication error Remedy Related parts Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Check replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing ...

Page 408: ...e data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E400 0003 04 Communication error Detection Description Disconnection of the harness between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected Remedy Related parts Harness between the...

Page 409: ... the Scanner Unit for this model E490 0101 04 Different DADF model error Detection Description A wrong DADF was installed Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the ADF Driver PCB and the Main Controller PCB UN05 ADF Driver PCB Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check if the installed DADF model matches the model set in...

Page 410: ...ector between the DC Controller PCB and the Sorter Controller PCB 2 Replace the Sorter Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual 3 Replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the...

Page 411: ...er PCB Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB 2 Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Repla...

Page 412: ...s cleared 1 Check replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Controller PCB and the Finisher Controller PCB 2 Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB 3 Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E503 0042 02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer...

Page 413: ...VEL1 FUNCTION SYSTEM FIN BK W E505 0004 02 Puncher unit data error Puncher Unit A1 Detection Description The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error The read data doesn t match with the written data Remedy PUNCHER UNIT A1 Related parts Puncher Controller PCB PCB301 Remedy Replace the Puncher Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Repl...

Page 414: ...ror in the Paper End Assist Motor Finisher AA1 Detection Description The Paper End Assist HP Sensor does not detect the assist belt when the Paper End Assist Motor has been driven for 2 seconds Remedy STAPLE FIN AA1 BOOKLET FIN AA1 Related parts Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor PS123 to the Finisher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor M113 to the Finisher Controll...

Page 415: ...second had passed after the Rear Alignment Motor operation started b The front aligning plate does not come off the Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor although the Front Aligning Plate Motor has been driven for 4 seconds Remedy a INNER FIN K1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controll...

Page 416: ...M103 Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E531 8001 02 a Stapler Motor error Finisher K1 b Staple HP error Finisher AA1 Detection Description a The Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0...

Page 417: ...2 a Stapler Shift Motor error Finisher K1 b Stapler Shift HP error Finisher AA1 Detection Description a The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Stapler Shift Motor operation started b The stapler unit does not come off the Stapler Shift HP Sensor although the Stapler Shift Motor has been driven for 5 seconds Remedy a INNER FIN K1 Related parts Harnesse...

Page 418: ...001 02 Return Belt Motor error Finisher K1 Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Return Belt Motor operation started Remedy INNER FIN K1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor Return Belt...

Page 419: ...Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E535 8002 02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor Finisher AA1 Detection Description The Swing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the swing guide when the Swing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second Remedy STAPLE FIN AA1 BOOKLET FIN AA1 Related parts Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor PS119 to the Finisher C...

Page 420: ...ntroller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E537 8002 02 a Front Alignment Motor error Finisher K1 b Rear Aligning Plate HP error Finisher AA1 Detection Description a The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation started b The Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor does not detect ...

Page 421: ...hift Motor error Finisher K1 b Tray 1 shift area error Finisher AA1 Detection Description a The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF or the Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor was not turned ON although 3 5 seconds had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation started in the tray down operation The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF after the tray was moved down in t...

Page 422: ... 0003 02 Error in the Cooling Fan Finisher AA1 Detection Description The lock signal is detected 1 2 seconds or more while the fan operates Remedy STAPLE FIN AA1 BOOKLET FIN AA1 Related parts Harnesses from the Cooling Fan FM101 to the Finisher Controller PCB Cooling Fan FM101 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing...

Page 423: ... AA1 b Error in the Sorter Shift Motor Sorter A1 Detection Description a The escape delivery roller does not come off the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor when the Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second b The shift roller does not come off the Sorter Shift HP Sensor when the shift roller has been driven for the specified distance at shift operation Remedy a STAPLE FIN AA1 BOOKLET...

Page 424: ...ensor PS2 to the Sorter Controller PCB Harnesses from the Sorter Shift Motor M2 to the Sorter Controller PCB Sorter Shift HP Sensor PS2 Sorter Shift Motor M2 Sorter Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Sorter Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E553 8011 02 Error in...

Page 425: ...dle Feed Paddle Motor has been driven for 1 second Remedy STAPLE FIN AA1 BOOKLET FIN AA1 Related parts Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor PS206 to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Saddle Feed Paddle Motor M201 to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Saddle Paddle HP Sensor PS206 Saddle Feed Paddle Motor M201 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Finisher Controller PCB P...

Page 426: ...cing the Parts in the Service Manual E577 8001 02 a Paddle Motor error Finisher K1 b Error in the Stack Delivery Paddle Motor Finisher AA1 Detection Description a The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle Motor operation started The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor b The paddle does not come off the Paddle HP Sensor...

Page 427: ...ode may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacin...

Page 428: ...2 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW1...

Page 429: ...nt When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E590 8001 02 Error in the Punch Motor Puncher Unit A1 Detection Description The punch does not come off the Punch HP Sensor when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0 2 seconds Remedy PUNCHER UNIT A1 Related parts Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 PS303 to the Puncher Relay PCB Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 PS304 to the Puncher Relay PCB ...

Page 430: ...s in the Service Manual E593 8001 02 Error in the Punch Shift Motor Puncher Unit A1 Detection Description The punch unit does not come off the Punch Slide HP Sensor when shifting the punch unit by 9mm toward rear Remedy PUNCHER UNIT A1 Related parts Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor PS302 to the Puncher Controller PCB Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor M302 to the Puncher Controller PCB P...

Page 431: ...Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E5F0 8002 02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor Finisher AA1 Detection Description The Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper end stopper when the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 4 seconds Remedy STAPLE FIN AA1 BOOKLET FIN AA1 Related parts Harnesses f...

Page 432: ...ignment Motor M203 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether there is n...

Page 433: ...B201 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit 2 Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch ...

Page 434: ...cing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment When Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual E5F6 8003 02 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Folding Motor clock error Finisher AA1 Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Folding Motor is detected 0 2 seconds or more while the motor operates Remedy STAPLE FIN AA1 BOOKLET FIN AA1 Related parts Harnesses from the Saddle Paper...

Page 435: ...roller PCB Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor PS205 Saddle Switching Lever Motor M202 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB201 Finisher Controller PCB PCB101 Points to note at work When the Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 turns on at the detection timing of this error this error code may be displayed Accordingly perform the following work before checking the related parts 1 Check whether there is not t...

Page 436: ...etection Description HDD failed to be Ready or HDD was not formatted When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the related harn...

Page 437: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0111 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL related file storage area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD...

Page 438: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0211 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and ...

Page 439: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0311 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Contro...

Page 440: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0411 00 HDD error Detection Description Logical partition error was detected File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Controller PCB U...

Page 441: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0511 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and ...

Page 442: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0611 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and ...

Page 443: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0711 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area temporary file File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05...

Page 444: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0811 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the general application related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD ...

Page 445: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 0911 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data temporary file File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Mai...

Page 446: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 1011 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Contro...

Page 447: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 1111 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the update related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Cont...

Page 448: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 1211 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the license related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Con...

Page 449: ...e could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 5 1 Check the related harness cable and conn...

Page 450: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 1411 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP temporary file alternative memory area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and t...

Page 451: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 1711 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD HDD Main Controlle...

Page 452: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 1811 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and t...

Page 453: ...so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E602 1911 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD...

Page 454: ...s Main Controller PCB UN05 7000 0001 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Turn ON the main power and check whether the error is cleared 2 Execute the key clear using SST to make an unformatted disk CAUTION E602 0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk Therefore be sure to format the HDD 3 Enter safe mode using 2 8...

Page 455: ...r 2 Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 3 Check replace the related parts Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may ...

Page 456: ...up COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E613 2048 00 Memory error Detection Description Memory of the Main Controller PCB is faulty Remedy Related parts Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Check replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data af...

Page 457: ...wer remove and then install the Flash PCB to check that it is installed properly 2 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 3 Replace the Main Controller PCB Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service...

Page 458: ...ckup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual 4 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 5 Replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data m...

Page 459: ...the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E614 0211 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in the system area File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts Flash PCB Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in th...

Page 460: ...again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual 4 After ...

Page 461: ...edy Related parts Flash PCB Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared When prioritizing clearing of the error skip Remedies 2 and 3 Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 8 and execute HD CHE...

Page 462: ...install the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E614 0601 00 Flash PCB err...

Page 463: ...error log Remedy Related parts Flash PCB Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared When prioritizing clearing of the error skip Remedies 2 and 3 Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 8 and e...

Page 464: ...the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E614 4000 00 Flash PCB error Detec...

Page 465: ...r replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 3 Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed 4 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive 5 If another error occurs clear the error by performing the remedy for it 6 Replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up t...

Page 466: ...ter replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive E614 9000 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description SRAM device access related error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 After turning ...

Page 467: ...turning OFF the main power remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is properly installed 2 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive E614 FF01 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description Flash error Unidentified Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally ...

Page 468: ...ted in self diagnosis of the encryption library Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Reinstall the necessary application software and restore the backup data once the error is cleared 1 After reinstalling the system software using SST or a USB flash drive turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to t...

Page 469: ...FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E713 0011 05 Communication error Detection Description Retransmission of NACK was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher Remedy Related parts R1 00 a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER AA1 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN049 J182 and the Finisher Controller PCB Harness between the Lo...

Page 470: ...rotected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E713 0021 05 Communication error Detection Description Reception incomplete was detected in communication with the finisher Remedy Related parts R1 00 a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER AA1 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN049 J182 and the Finisher Controller PCB Harness between the Low Voltage ...

Page 471: ...FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E713 0030 05 Communication error Detection Description An initialization error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher Remedy Related parts R1 00 a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER AA1 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN049 J182 and the Finisher Controller PCB Harness between the Low Voltage Pow...

Page 472: ...n between charging management equipment and machine and check that the Cable is not open circuit Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when switching to the operation without charging management equipment To prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment this error code is displayed E719 0004 00 Coin vendor error Detection Description...

Page 473: ...ve 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E732 0001 04 Communication error Detection Description...

Page 474: ...E732 0023 04 Communication error Detection Description A communication error of the Main Controller PCB was detected at startup recovery from sleep Remedy Related parts Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replace...

Page 475: ...n Controller PCB UN05 J4511 DC Controller PCB UN049 Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FU...

Page 476: ...y Remedy Check replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB E733 F002 05 Printer communication error Detection Description A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the Laser Driver PCB was detected Remedy Related parts 2 00 Flat Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J9500 and the Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 J201 Flat Cable between the Y M Laser ...

Page 477: ... Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Remove and then install the Image Analysis Board 2 If the error is not cleared replace the Image Analysis Board 3 After replacing the Image Analysis Board reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive E746 0022 ...

Page 478: ...k the user to enter System Manager ID and System Manager PIN when logging in 3 Enter the password set at backup operation 4 When the restoration completion screen is displayed click OK Remove the USB memory and turn OFF and then ON the main power E746 0033 00 TPM error Detection Description It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent Remedy If the TPM key was backed up Restore the TPM key 1 ...

Page 479: ...ackup data by referring to the backup data list 2 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute Flash Format using a USB flash drive 3 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 4 Restore the backup data b When the error code has been changed to another one see the remedy for the corresponding code Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjust...

Page 480: ...e data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E748 2026 00 Main Controller PCB access error Detection Description Main controller board access errors Remedy Related parts Main Controller PCB UN05 Remedy Check replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the Main Controller PCB back up the service mo...

Page 481: ...hine is automatically rebooted after log collection E753 0001 00 Download Error Detection Description Update of the system software failed Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 3 Replace the FLASH PCB and reinstall the system software 4 Collect debug ...

Page 482: ...rotected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E806 0200 05 Motor Fan error Detection Description Unlocked state was detected 2 consecutive times in 3 sec when the Motor Fan was driven Remedy Related parts Power Supply Unit DC Controller PCB UN049 J133 Harness connecting the DC Controller PCB J124 and the Relay Connector J1342 Motor Fan FM...

Page 483: ...efore replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E811 0000 05 Fuse in the Fixing Fuse PCB blowout error Detection Description The fuse in the Fixing Fuse PCB was not blown out at power on Remedy...

Page 484: ...cur during a service visit but is found in the log 1 Clean the inlet on the side where the fan is installed and remove dust 2 Remove dust from the Controller Fan 3 If the space on the side where the fan is installed is less than 10 cm ask the user to secure enough space E882 0001 05 Main Power Supply Switch error Detection Description The main power was not turned OFF due to the solenoid in the Ma...

Page 485: ...ment of the Laser Scanner Unit execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL...

Page 486: ...bug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence E996 0CA8 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting jam log Printer Continuous 0CA8 jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference B...

Page 487: ...urrence E996 0CB3 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting jam log Printer Continuous 0CB3 jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence E996 0CB4 05 Error for collecting sequence j...

Page 488: ...r a Number Starting with an Error Code Is Displayed Countermeasures for Each Error Code Service Error Code Code Cause Remedy 3016 T R An instruction of disconnec tion BYE was received from the network at an unexpected time Perform a communication again 1 G3FAX 2 IPFAX No 1 No 2 T R Description 100 3100 T at time of transmission the procedural signal has been transmitted more than speci fied 101 31...

Page 489: ...smission of EOP a signal other than PIN PIP MCF RTP or RTN has been received 289 3289 T after transmission of EOM a signal other than PIN PIP MCF RTP or RTN has been received 290 3290 T after transmission of MPS a signal other than PIN PIP MCF RTP or RTN has been received 670 3670 T at time of V 8 late start the V 8 ability of DIS front the receiving party is expected to be detected and the CI sig...

Page 490: ...or T5 time out 60 sec has occurred 774 3774 T at time of ECM transmission ERR is received after transmission of EOR NULL 775 3775 T at time of ECM transmission no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR MPS causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified 777 3777 T at time of ECM transmission DCN is received after transmission of EOR MPS 778 3778 T at time of EC...

Page 491: ...nge in device status after specified period of time has passed RDS server creates A Operation B Cause C Remedy 01 0004 Notification of IP address change A Operation B Cause C Remedy IP address has been changed Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW 01 0005 Restricted operation notification A Operation B Cause C Remedy The device entered limited function mode ...

Page 492: ... with the gear 4 Check the Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor M06 5 Replace the DC Controller PCB 04 0002 Cassette 2 Lifter error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor Message displayed on the Control Panel Paper source needs to be checked Call service rep Measures While the Cassette 2 is removed turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 2 and check the oper...

Page 493: ... with the gear 4 Check the Cassette 3 4 Lifter Motor M102 5 Replace the DC Controller PCB 04 0004 Cassette 4 Lifter error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor Message displayed on the Control Panel Paper source needs to be checked Call service rep Measures While the Cassette 4 is removed turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 4 and check the ope...

Page 494: ...by UGW 04 0011 Cassette 1 paper feed retry error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Movement Nothing in particular Cause The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times Measures Check the Cassette 1 Pickup and Feed and Separation Rollers Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not 04 0012 Cassette 2 paper feed retry error A Operatio...

Page 495: ...of the DC Controller PCB UN049 4 Replace the Drum Unit C 09 0013 Drum memory detection error Bk A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause The memory of the Drum Unit Bk could not be detected Measures 1 Remove and then install the Drum Unit Bk 2 Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New Old PCB Bk UN38 3 Disconnect and then connect the connector J130 of the DC Controller PCB UN049 4 Replace the Drum Un...

Page 496: ... step 5 2 Check and clean the sensor window of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit 3 Check that the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Shutter is properly installed and it is not damaged 4 Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid SL02 5 Check the harness connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Registration Patch Sensor 6 Replace the Registration Patch Sensor Unit 7 Replace the D...

Page 497: ...ed 10 0401 Toner Bottle empty alarm Y A Operation B Cause C Remedy Toner Bottle empty was detected 10 0402 Toner Bottle empty alarm M A Operation B Cause C Remedy Toner Bottle empty was detected 10 0403 Toner Bottle empty alarm C A Operation B Cause C Remedy Toner Bottle empty was detected 10 0404 Toner Bottle empty alarm Bk A Operation B Cause C Remedy Toner Bottle empty was detected 10 F017 Tone...

Page 498: ...ner Container high consumption alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy It was detected that the target part was at a high level of daily consumption 13 0000 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0020 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0021 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0022 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0023 For R D A Operation B C...

Page 499: ...13 0100 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0FFC For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0FFD For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0FFE For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0FFF For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 10FD For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 14 0000 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 14 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 14 1000 For R D A Operation B Cause C Re...

Page 500: ...d each LED PCB 1 4 Replace each LED PCB 29 0401 Drum K pre exposure alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy An error in pre exposure of the drum K was detected Detection condition timing Warm up rotation Detection condition When the difference in detection value is within the specified value when the pre exposure light intensity is changed Remedy 1 Visual check in service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P PR...

Page 501: ...e the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 7 Replace the DC Controller PCB 30 0028 A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for black A Operation B Cause C Remedy Remedy 1 Check the harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB and the DC Controller PCB open circuit caught cable connector disconnection Replace the harness if it is faulty 2 Chec...

Page 502: ...ing any measures may lead to E614 Measures Back up the data stored in the FLASH memory and restore the data after replacing the FLASH memory 31 0010 The configuration of an option controlled by the Main Controller has been changed A Operation B Cause C Remedy A change in configuration of an option such as a change in the configuration of the Fax Board a change in the configuration of the Voice Boa...

Page 503: ...s in reading 10 sets of auto registration pattern Registration Patch Sensor failure Registration Patch Sensor cleaning member covered the registration detection sensor or no image drew on the ITB 34 0024 The correction value M of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjustment A Operation B Cause C Remedy 34 0026 The correction valu...

Page 504: ...ion After replacing the related parts execute Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 34 2201 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the vertical scanning direction was not found M A Operation B Cause C Remedy 34 2211 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the...

Page 505: ...rror message E code EBD0002 This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 38 0103 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Data Backup Service Application Error Error for MDAS4BR not to be available Error message E code EBD0003 This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 38 0104 Application generate...

Page 506: ...enerated by the application 38 0113 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Data Backup Service Application Error Error by the certification failure of the Access Token Provider Error message E code EAC0002 This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 38 0114 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Data Backup Service Appl...

Page 507: ...ervice call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0213 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0220 Application...

Page 508: ...splayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0241 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Multi purpose Tray_Envelope This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0242 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Multi purpose Tray...

Page 509: ...onally This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0263 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_At 2 sided printing_First time in the day This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0290 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call...

Page 510: ...age_Cyan This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0330 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0331 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call applica...

Page 511: ...Black This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0352 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Light_Yellow This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0353 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure...

Page 512: ...LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0374 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Dark_Cyan This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0380 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified ...

Page 513: ...ed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0524 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0530 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Not sp...

Page 514: ...rwarding_SEND This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0631 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Settings_Printer driver installation This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 0641 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call applica...

Page 515: ...being generated by the application 39 1212 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1213 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the d...

Page 516: ...to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1240 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Multi purpose Tray_Not specified_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1241 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Multi purpose Tray_Envel...

Page 517: ...s alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1262 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_At 2 sided printing_Occasionally_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1263 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call applicatio...

Page 518: ...Magenta_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1324 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Cyan_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1330 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call app...

Page 519: ...ied_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1351 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Light_Black_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1352 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application ...

Page 520: ... on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1373 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Dark_Magenta_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1374 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Dark_Cyan_ Cancel This a...

Page 521: ...ed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1523 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1524 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Forwar...

Page 522: ...rding_Fax_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1622 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Settings_Forwarding_SEND_ Cancel This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 1631 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call applica...

Page 523: ...tion B Cause C Remedy Service call application Error message E code _ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2210 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm b...

Page 524: ...e This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2233 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 3_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2234 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service ca...

Page 525: ...not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2260 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Paper jam_At 2 sided printing_Not specified_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2261 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call...

Page 526: ...ion change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2322 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Yellow_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2323 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remed...

Page 527: ...change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2344 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Lines_Cyan_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2350 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service ca...

Page 528: ...larm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2371 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Image failure_Dark_Black_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2372 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call applicatio...

Page 529: ... displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2521 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2522 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service ca...

Page 530: ..._Training_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2612 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Settings_Addition_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2621 Application generated alarm A Operation B ...

Page 531: ...his alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 39 2821 Application generated alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Service call application Order_Waste Toner Container_ Customer information change This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application 40 0070 Drum Unit Y prior notification alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy The li...

Page 532: ... Cause C Remedy Completion of Drum Unit C replacement was detected 43 0073 Drum Unit Bk replacement completion alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Completion of Drum Unit K replacement was detected 43 0076 Fixing Unit replacement completion alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Completion of Fixing Assembly replacement was detected 43 0091 Feed Roller DADF replacement completion alarm A Operation B Ca...

Page 533: ...sufficient at LED lighting 50 0015 Failure of the ADF Double Feed Sensor A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Failure of the Double Feed Sensor installed in the ADF Detection condition timing When a paper feed error of the Double Feed Sensor was detected at power on When an error of the output value of the Double Feed Sensor was detected during ADF job While an ADF job is being executed it is handle...

Page 534: ...that of the firmware in the host machine Timing At startup Movement symptom Cancel the automatic update Measures Update the firmware of the host machine 73 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0007 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0008 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0009 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0011 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0014 For R D A Oper...

Page 535: ...78 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 78 0002 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 78 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 78 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 78 0005 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 79 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 79 0002 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 79 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 79 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Re...

Page 536: ...80 0011 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0012 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0013 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0015 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0016 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0019 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Re...

Page 537: ... Function Settings Printer Printer Settings Settings Printer Operation Mode and send the data 83 0022 Reception of HPGL unanalyzable data A Operation B Cause C Remedy Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong select the appropriate PDL in Settings Registration Function Settings Printer Printer Settings Settings Printer Operation Mode and send the data 83 0023 Reception of N201 unanalyzable data A ...

Page 538: ...85 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 85 0002 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 85 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 85 0005 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 85 001A For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 85 002A For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 7 Error Jam Alarm 516 ...

Page 539: ... part is not the cause of the jam After the jam is removed the machine works Opening closing of the door Turning OFF and then ON the power Error near the target sensor soiling displacement failure of the sensor error in harness open circuit of harness soiling grease deterioration failure of a drive motor or soiling pa per dust deterioration failure of a drive roller POWER ON A power on jam occurs ...

Page 540: ...PS51 PS14 PS11 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 00 0101 DELAY Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS08 00 0102 DELAY Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor PS24 00 0106 DELAY Fixing Outlet Sensor PS10 00 0107 DELAY First Delivery Sensor PS14 00 0108 DELAY Second Delivery Reverse Sensor PS51 00 0109 DELAY Third Delivery Sensor PS52 00 0190 DELAY When paper reached the Registration Roller it had not ...

Page 541: ...QUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CA5 SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CA7 SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CA8 SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CA9 SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CAA SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CAB SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CAC SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CAE SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CAF SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CB0 SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CB3 SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CB4 SEQUENCE Sequence jam 00 0CB7 SEQUENCE Seq...

Page 542: ... PS_A7 01 0013 DELAY 01 0014 STNRY 01 0020 DOUBLE Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7 UN_BO8 01 0021 OTHER Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7 UN_BO8 01 0042 STNRY Post separation Sensor PS_R1 01 0043 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1 01 0044 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1 01 0045 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2 01 0046 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2 01 0047 DELAY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 01 0048 STNRY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 01 0049...

Page 543: ...POWER ON Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 01 00A5 POWER ON Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 01 00D5 OTHER Original Sensor PS_N1 DADF AV1 SR1 SR2 SR3 SR5 SR6 SR7 SR8 SR9 SR10 SR11 SR12 SR13 SR14 SR15 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Description Sensor ID 01 0001 DELAY 01 0002 STNRY 01 0003 DELAY Registration Sensor SR1 01 0004 STNRY Registration Sensor SR1 01 0005 DELAY 01 0006 STNRY 01 0007 DELAY 01 0008 STNRY 01 0009 DELA...

Page 544: ...en Closed Sensor SR6 01 0095 OTHER Document Set Sensor SR5 01 0096 OTHER 01 00A1 POWER ON Registration Sensor SR1 01 00A2 POWER ON Lead Sensor SR2 01 00A3 POWER ON Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3 01 00A6 POWER ON Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3 01 00D5 OTHER Registration Sensor Document Set Sensor SR1 SR5 Cassette Feeding Unit AP1 PS101 PS106 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 00 0103 DELAY Cass...

Page 545: ...free stapling jam Staple operation time out error 02 1805 ERROR Staple free stapling jam Return operation time out error after sta pling 02 1C14 ERROR 1 Error avoidance jam assist motor error 02 1C16 ERROR 1 Error avoidance jam paddle motor error 02 1C30 ERROR 1 Error avoidance jam rear alignment motor error 02 1C32 ERROR 1 Error avoidance jam stapler motor error 02 1C35 ERROR 1 Error avoidance ja...

Page 546: ...sher AA1 PS111 PS101 PS103 PS102 PS114 PS201 PS202 PS215 PS104 SW101 PS128 PS125 PS129 PS130 PS203 PS301 PS304 PS303 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 02 1001 DELAY Inlet sensor PS101 7 Error Jam Alarm 524 ...

Page 547: ...202 02 1400 COVER OP Front cover sensor Front cover switch PS104 SW101 02 1405 COVER OP Buffer Pass Open Closed Sensor PI203 02 1500 STAPLE Staple HP sensor PS125 02 1501 SDL STP Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor PS215 02 1801 ERROR Staple free Binding Motor Clock Sensor PS130 02 1802 ERROR Staple free Binding HP Sensor PS129 02 1803 ERROR Staple free stapling jam Clinch motor error 02 1804 ERROR Staple f...

Page 548: ...r jam 02 1F90 OTHER Time out jam 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A1 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 PS301 PS304 PS303 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 02 1600 PUNCH Punch HP Sensor 1 Punch HP Sensor 2 PS303 PS304 02 1C90 ERROR Error avoidance jam Punch Motor error 02 1C93 ERROR Error avoidance jam Punch Shift Motor error 7 Error Jam Alarm 526 ...

Page 549: ...Service Mode 8 Overview 528 COPIER Service mode for printer 545 FEEDER ADF service mode 928 SORTER Service mode for delivery options 934 BOARD Option board setting mode 957 FAX Serivce Mode for FAX 958 ...

Page 550: ...ACKUP This button is used to back up the service mode setting values RESTORE This button is used to restore the service mode setting values backed up by BACKUP SITUATION This function displays service mode items according to the situation LUI MASK This button is used to display a mask screen to prevent operations from being performed from the Control Panel while the service mode is being accessed ...

Page 551: ...mple COPIER DISPLAY VERSION screen 1 Press the i button 2 The title of each sub item is displayed To check the details of each item select the relevant item and press the i button 3 A detailed description of the sub item specifications and use methods setting screen etc is displayed Switching the Screen Display Level 1 2 Switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2 becomes easier 8 Service Mod...

Page 552: ... upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed the screen is switched to Level 2 screen NOTE This key combination can be used to enter the Level 2 screen Mode List screen Settings Registration 2 8 Service Mode 530 ...

Page 553: ...nt To be referred at parts replacement Major Adjustment To be referred at installation of the machine Sensor Check To be referred at checking of the sensor Part Check To be referred at operation check of the part The following three points are made available depending on each situation Display of related service mode that requires adjustment Display of causes and remedies Display of related images...

Page 554: ... button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type Example In the case of the Registration Sensor of the host machine press the button red dotted frame at COPIER P SENSOR Electrical parts classification Device classification 8 Service Mode 532 ...

Page 555: ...the screen 7 Press the i button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components How to Use Parts Check In the Parts Check of situation mode among electrical components used motors fans solenoids and clutches those that can operate alone can be operated from the screen and the operations can be checked The operation procedure is shown below 8 Service Mode 533 ...

Page 556: ...N Parts Check 2 Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type Example In the case of a motor of the host machine press the button red dotted frame at COPIER MOTOR Electrical parts classification Device classification 3 A list of electrical component types for the selected device whose operation can be checked is displayed 4 Select the electrical com...

Page 557: ...ile the electrical component is driven After the electrical component has been driven for a specified period of time OK is displayed if transmission of the drive signal succeeded or NG is displayed if failed 8 Service Mode 535 ...

Page 558: ... Security Support A password can be specified to prevent unauthorized access to the service mode Related Service Mode Setting password type when the screen is switched to the service mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW PSWD SW Level 1 The password for service engineer when the screen is switched to the service mode Level 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW SM PSWD 8 Service Mode 536 ...

Page 559: ...wing procedure to check that you can login to service mode 1 When setting PSWD SW to 1 system administrator or 2 ServiceMode_070Backup in step 1 the system administrator password entry screen will be displayed so enter the system administrator ID in Sys Manager ID 1 and system administrator password in Password 2 and then press the OK button 1 2 2 When setting PSWD SW to 2 system administrator ser...

Page 560: ...ing remote operation the user may perform an operation on the Control Panel and an unexpected processing may be executed To solve these security problems a function has been added to display a message on the Control Panel screen when the machine is being operated remotely using Remote Operation Viewer in order to prevent the user from performing unexpected operations As shown in the figure below t...

Page 561: ...wever the service mode is not forcibly terminated if the Updater screen has been accessed from service mode When this function is enabled all operations operations from the Touch Panel or hardware keys other than screen brightness adjustment and operation on the Energy Saver key are disabled Procedure for Enabling This Function The procedure for enabling this function is shown below 1 Use the Remo...

Page 562: ...ding item is not found on the service label write the value in blank field The service label of this machine is affixed to the position shown below DCON Setting Items RCON Setting Items Output of Service Print Data The service print data such as P PRINT can be output as a file By executing the following service mode data at the time can be saved in the HDD Service Mode Level 1 Copier Function MISC...

Page 563: ...f the temperature and humidity inside the machine surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log COPIER Function MISC P PJH P 1 Output of details on print job history 100 jobs COPIER Function MISC P PJH P 2 Output of details on print job history all jobs COPIER Function MISC P USBH PRT Output of USB device information report COPIER Function MISC P TNRB RPT Output of the Toner Container ID repor...

Page 564: ... in some cases Moving the file in download mode Preparation The following item needs to be prepared to export the service print file to a USB flash drive USB flash drive FAT32 format file system that is not locked with a password To display the USB menu the said model s firmware must already be registered Overall flow 1 Selecting RPT FILE Select service mode Copier Function MISC P RPT FILE and the...

Page 565: ...Q RWKHU NH V How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST The procedure for exporting the service print file to a PC using SST will now be described SST described in the procedure is Ver 4 72 1 Start the SST 2 Select the model 1 to be connected and the information file for separate download 2 Single Then check the network settings and click the Start button 1 2 iA4245 7 8 Service Mode 543 ...

Page 566: ...tton iA4245 iA4245 iA4245 7 4 Select Report and click the Start button 7 iA4245 5 Specify the folder name to be saved and enter comments if necessary Then click the Store button iA4245 7 6 Click the OK button 8 Service Mode 544 ...

Page 567: ...play only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ECO 1 Display of ECO ID PCB firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of the ECO ID PCB Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SORTER 1 Display of FIN CONT firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB Use Case When upgrading t...

Page 568: ... Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG DE 1 Display of German language file version Detail To display the version of German language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG IT 1 Display of Italian language file version Detail To display the version of Italian language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate M...

Page 569: ...e 00 01 to 99 99 LANG KO 2 Display of Korean language file version Detail To display the version of Korean language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG NL 2 Display of Dutch language file version Detail To display the version of Dutch language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A...

Page 570: ...play Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver smpl Detail To display the version of Chinese language file simplified Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ECO ID 2 Display of ECO ID code Detail To display the ECO ID code Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display...

Page 571: ...9 99 MEDIA JA 2 Dspl of Japanese media information ver Detail To display the version of Japanese media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA EN 2 Dspl of English media information ver Detail To display the version of English media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A...

Page 572: ...e 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA EL 2 Dspl of Greek media information version Detail To display the version of Greek media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA ES 2 Dspl of Spanish media information ver Detail To display the version of Spanish media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate ...

Page 573: ...99 99 MEDIA PT 2 Dspl of Portuguese media information ver Detail To display the version of Portuguese media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA RU 2 Dspl of Russian media information ver Detail To display the version of Russian media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Metho...

Page 574: ...e firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 FAX1 1 Display of 1 line FAX PCB ROM version Detail To display the ROM version of 1 line FAX PCB NULL is displayed if the PCB is not connected Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range ASCII character string 12 digits FAX2 3 4 1 Display of 2 line FAX PCB ...

Page 575: ...o display the version of Spanish language file in service mode Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 TSP JLK 1 Dspl Image Data Analyzer Board version Detail To display the version of Image Data Analyzer Board Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 L...

Page 576: ... Range 00 00 to 99 99 LANG AR 2 Dspl of Arabic language file ver Detail To display the version of Arabic language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG MS 2 Dspl of Malay language file ver Detail To display the version of Malay language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display ...

Page 577: ... RPTL HU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Hungarian file version Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 RPTL NL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Dutch file version Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Ad...

Page 578: ...to 99 99 RPTL BU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Bulgarian file version Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 RPTL CR 2 Dspl RUI Portal Croatian file version Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading t...

Page 579: ...nge 00 01 to 99 99 BF PASS 1 Display of BF CONT firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of Buffer Pass Unit Controller PCB Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SORT SLV 1 Dspl of FIN CONT Sub firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB Sub Use Case When upgrading the ...

Page 580: ...n replacing the Main Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Reverse type 1 1 path type 2 Selectable type Default Value According to the setting at shipment Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION CUSTOM SCANTYPE DL RCON 1 Display of RCON type Detail To display the type of RCON which is a system software The RCON type differs depending on the types of the R...

Page 581: ...ory capacity Detail To display the capacity of memory for image processing on the Main Controller PCB Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the machine Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Unit MB COINROBO 1 Dspl of Coin Manager connection state Detail To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin Manager Adj S...

Page 582: ...te Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Unit Appropriate Target Value 1 99 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ABS HUM 1 Display of outside moisture content Detail To display the absolute moisture content outside the machine This is measured by the Environment Sensor that detects the outside air Use Case When checking the moisture content outside the machine Adj Set Operate Method N A Di...

Page 583: ...ay of estimated inside humidity Detail To display the estimated relative humidity inside the machine that is calculated from the estimated temperature inside the machine and moisture content outside the machine Use Case When checking the humidity inside the machine Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Unit Appropriate Target Value 1 99 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ...

Page 584: ...e 0 to 3500 Appropriate Target Value 200 3000 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P 1ATVC EX Amount of Change per Unit 1 1ATVC C 2 Dspl C clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage Detail To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control 1 1 speed for C color As Vb is closer to 3500 the Primary Transfer Roller is closer to the end of life so image failure leopard pattern image ...

Page 585: ...et Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 512 2047 TARGET G 2 Shading target value G Detail To display the target value of Green Continuous display of 0 minimum or 65535 maximum is considered a failure of the Main Controller PCB When the value is out of the target value range image failure or E302 shading error may have occurred Identify the cause according to the value Use Case When replacing ...

Page 586: ...anned image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN OR 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit R frt Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit for front side Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Main Controller PCB W...

Page 587: ...perate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 LAMP BW 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL B W front Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit for front side in B W scanning mode Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 55 to 27...

Page 588: ...2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value B W back Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit for back side in B W scanning mode Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 116 GAIN BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1 B W frt Detail To display the Reading Sensor B W gain level adjus...

Page 589: ...play Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN2BW3 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL3 B W back Detail To display the Reading Sensor B W gain level adjustment value 3 of the Scanner Unit for back side Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN2B...

Page 590: ...in even numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit for back side Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Main Controller PCB Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB At scanned image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 0 143 GAIN2 EG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit G back D...

Page 591: ...Y 2 For R D PVCONT M 2 For R D PVCONT C 2 For R D PVCONT K 2 For R D DENS COPIER Service mode for printer DISPLAY State display mode DENS DENS Y 1 Dspl Y color toner density change ratio Detail To display the deviation of Y color toner density from the target value in percentage If the deviation is not acceptable E020 occurs This may be caused by deterioration of the developer failure disconnectio...

Page 592: ...perate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 700 to 700 Unit Appropriate Target Value 300 300 Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C Amount of Change per Unit 0 01 DENS K 1 Dspl Bk color toner density change ratio Detail To display the deviation of Bk color toner density from the target value in percentage If the deviation is not acceptable E020 occurs This may be caused by deteri...

Page 593: ... image failure fogging carrier adherence low density etc Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 150 500 D C TRGT 2 Dspl C clr patch target dens ATR ctrl Detail To display the target density for C color patch image formed at ATR control Use Case When analyzing the cause of image failure fogging carrier adherence low density etc Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Va...

Page 594: ...to 255 Appropriate Target Value 50 200 Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS K DEV DC Y 2 Dspl of Y color developing DC voltage Detail To display the latest Y color developing DC voltage Vdc Use Case When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence When fogging occurs is deteriorated Display Adj Set Range 1000 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 490 600 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DEV D...

Page 595: ...ase in density fogging occurs Display Adj Set Range 1600 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 1400 1200 Amount of Change per Unit 1 CHG DC C 2 Dspl C color primary charge DC voltage Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of C color Use Case When decrease in density fogging occurs Display Adj Set Range 1600 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 1400 1200 Amount of Change per Unit 1...

Page 596: ...olor toner density TD ratio detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR control from the target value are shown Sharp change in values may indicate ATR Sensor disconnection failure whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system Use Case When checking the toner density in the Developing Unit at low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 700 to 700 Unit Appropriat...

Page 597: ... To display the latest 8 Y color toner supply log data Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper Use Case When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Appropriate Target Value 0 10 SPL LG M 2 Display of M color toner supply log Detail To display the latest 8 M color toner supply log data Each data ...

Page 598: ...Sensor Front Use Case At low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 300 900 P B S Y 2 Dspl ITB rear side base intnsty Swave Detail To display the ITB background light intensity S wave detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Rear At low density or fogging deterioration use this item to check whether there is a problem in the Registration Patch Se...

Page 599: ...color toner supply log Detail To display the latest 8 Bk color toner supply log data Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper Use Case When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence low density or fogging deterioration Display Adj Set Range 0 to 100 Appropriate Target Value 0 10 Y LED DA 1 Dspl rear side Patch Sensor intensity Detail To display the LED light intensi...

Page 600: ...0 FF LPOWER C 2 Display of C color laser light intensity Detail To display the C color laser light intensity in real time Use Case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 to FF Appropriate Target Value 50 FF LPOWER K 2 Display of Bk clr laser light intensity Detail To display the Bk color laser light intensity in real t...

Page 601: ... Settings When the DC Controller is replaced Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Transmission disabled 1 Transmission enabled 1st column Toner Y 2nd column Toner M 3rd column Toner C 4th column Toner K 5th column Waste Toner Container 6th column Fixing Web 7th to 8th column Spare Default Value 0 HT C COPIER Service mode for printer DISPLAY State display mode HT C TGT A Y 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y color ...

Page 602: ...hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT B M 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen B M color target VL Detail To display the M color patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check t...

Page 603: ...C C 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen C C color target VL Detail To display the C color patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Rang...

Page 604: ...D SGNL C K 2 For R D SGNL C C 2 For R D DLTA A Y 2 For R D DLTA A M 2 For R D DLTA A C 2 For R D DLTA A K 2 For R D DLTA B Y 2 For R D DLTA B M 2 For R D DLTA B C 2 For R D DLTA B K 2 For R D DLTA C Y 2 For R D DLTA C M 2 For R D DLTA C C 2 For R D DLTA C K 2 For R D I O This item is not used because it is intended for R D The I O information can be found in service mode SITUATION Sensor Check 8 S...

Page 605: ... ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJ Y 1 Adj start pstn in book mode horz scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data enter the value of service label Decrease the value when th...

Page 606: ...e image position is moved to the rear side by 0 1 mm The setting is applied to only the image on the front side in the case of DADF 1 path model or the images on both the front and back sides in the case of DADF reverse model Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and pres...

Page 607: ...earing the Reader related RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is incremented by 1 the image position is moved to the rear side by 0 1 mm Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting...

Page 608: ...T X Y SH TRGT 1 Shading target VL B W entry Copyboard Detail To enter the B W shading target value in copyboard reading mode When replacing the Main Controller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Scanner Unit execute DF WLVL3 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data W...

Page 609: ...el is installed whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF reverse model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit for front side Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Ran...

Page 610: ...r Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC MTF2 M2 1 MTF value 2 entry horz scan front side Detail To enter the setting value 2 for calculating MTF filter c...

Page 611: ...nit for front side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Cha...

Page 612: ...nit for front side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Cha...

Page 613: ...it for front side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Chan...

Page 614: ...it for front side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Chan...

Page 615: ...it for front side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Chan...

Page 616: ...ller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data enter the value of service label The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data When replacing the Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main po...

Page 617: ...er The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When the Copyboard or DADF reverse model is installed the setting of this item is disabled Display Adj Set Range 1 t...

Page 618: ...t Enter the value of service label on the Reader The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When the Copyboard or DADF reverse model is installed the setting of t...

Page 619: ...nit for back side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Chan...

Page 620: ...nit for back side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Chan...

Page 621: ...Unit for back side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Cha...

Page 622: ...it for back side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Chang...

Page 623: ...it for back side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Chang...

Page 624: ...ce label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFCH R2 1 Complex chart No 2...

Page 625: ...r The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When the Copyboard or DADF reverse model is installed the setting of this item is disabled Display Adj Set Range 1 to...

Page 626: ...er the value of service label on the Reader The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When the Copyboard or DADF reverse model is installed the setting of this i...

Page 627: ...r Unit for front side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of ...

Page 628: ...Unit for front side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Ch...

Page 629: ... Unit for back side Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Ch...

Page 630: ...rvice label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 20 to 85 Default Value 50 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFCH2K2 1 Complex chart N...

Page 631: ...er The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When the Copyboard or DADF reverse model is installed the setting of this item is disabled Display Adj Set Range 1 t...

Page 632: ...nd DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data When replacing the Scanner Unit for back side Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch C...

Page 633: ...ontroller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit for back side execute DF WLVL3 and DF WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF 1 path model is installed Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data When replacing the Copyboar...

Page 634: ...de Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG HS Y 1 Fine adj Y clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of Y color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel or less Use Case When Y color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs smaller than 1 pixel Adj Set Operate Method Enter the ...

Page 635: ...n It is recommended to use this item from situation mode Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit line Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG V C 1 Ruf adj C clr wrt start pstn vert scan Detail To adjust the write start position of C color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use Case When C color displacement in vertical scanning direction occurs Adj Set Operate...

Page 636: ...nge per Unit 1 REG HS M 1 Fine adj M clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of M color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of less than 1 pixel Use Case When M color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs smaller than 1 pixel Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution It ...

Page 637: ...he setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 5 0 25 4 0 20 3 0 15 2 0 10 1 0 05 0 0 00 1 0 05 2 0 10 3 0 15 4 0 20 5 0 25 Unit Appropriate Target Value 2 2 Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 05 LS H YL 1 Adj Y C copy ratio correction offset 1 Detail To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between Y color and C color Enter the value o...

Page 638: ...n mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT H 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust th...

Page 639: ...mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT H 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust the ...

Page 640: ...ation mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT H 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjus...

Page 641: ...n mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT V 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust th...

Page 642: ...mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Execute LS INT V 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When making the adjustment be sure to also adjust the ...

Page 643: ...Related Service Mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT V COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS V YL YC YR ML MC MR KL KR LS V KR 1 Adj Bk C distortion correction offset 3 Detail To adjust the offset of distortion correction between Bk color and C color Enter the value of a C Bk color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left image group of C Bk color printed on the corr...

Page 644: ...R patch Y clr toner dens tgt VL entry Detail To enter the Y color toner density target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB The Y color toner density is detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit Y is initialized Use Case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controller PCB clearing of RAM data and then re entering ...

Page 645: ...data Use Case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controller PCB clearing of RAM data and then re entering the value after the processing is done Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 120 It may vary by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTAL...

Page 646: ...the value when fogging scattering occurs In principle the value should be the same as that of LLMT PTM Use Case When an image failure density failure coarseness fogging carrier adherence scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Divi...

Page 647: ...ring occurs In principle the value should be the same as that of HLMT PTM Use Case When an image failure density failure coarseness fogging carrier adherence scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display Adj Set Range 4 ...

Page 648: ...alue of D max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change Adjust the offset of the C color density target value of D max control Use Case When an image failure occurs due to environment change Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 128 Default Value 0 P TG Y 2 Adj of Y color ATR patch dens ...

Page 649: ...ailure density failure fogging carrier adherence etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Make 50 prints of approx 10 image ratio e g COPIER TEST PG TYPE 16 4 times 3 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density If the target value is changed foggin...

Page 650: ...0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTK Amount of Change per Unit 0 5 LLMT PTK 2 Adj Bk clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit Detail To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor Bk As the value is incremented by 1 the lower limit is increased by 0 5 Increase the value when a density failure coarseness occurs and decrease the value when fogging scat...

Page 651: ... by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M 4 CONT C 1 ATR Sensor C control voltage entry Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor C When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controller ...

Page 652: ...y by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M D C LVL 1 Entry of ATR patch C clr correction VL Detail To enter the C color correction value of ATR patch The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit C is initialized When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When c...

Page 653: ...Sensor Unit When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data When backup restoration cannot be performed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution After replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit enter a series of values written on the label and execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment quick adjustment Display Adj Set Range 200 to 3200 Appropriat...

Page 654: ...e Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Quick Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 1 SOFST F1 1 Pch Sns F light RX charcs weak Swave Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light S wave when the light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor Front is weak When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit enter the value written on the label include...

Page 655: ... Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Quick Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 1 POFST F2 1 Pch Sns F light RX charcs strg Pwave Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light P wave when the light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor Front is strong When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit enter the value written on the label includ...

Page 656: ...e Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Quick Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 1 SOFST F2 1 Pch Sns F light RX charcs strg Swave Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light S wave when the light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor Front is strong When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit enter the value written on the label inclu...

Page 657: ...nt of Change per Unit 1 BLANK COPIER Service mode for printer ADJUST Adjustment mode BLANK BLANK T 1 Adjustment of leading edge margin Detail To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel Use Case Upon user s request to reduce the margin When increasing the margin for transfer separation fixing s...

Page 658: ...n rcycl 2 Detail To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of thin paper1 2 and recycled paper 2 As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel Increase the value when blur at leading edge wrinkles occur with thin paper 1 2 and recycled paper 2 A value to which the setting value of BLANK B is added is applied as the margin Use Case When increasin...

Page 659: ...ional Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 5 VCONT M 2 Adj of M color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for M color As the value is changed by 1 the contrast potential is changed by 5 V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller...

Page 660: ... Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Amount of Change per Unit 5 VCONT K 2 Adj of Bk color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for Bk color As the value is changed by 1 the contrast potential is changed by 5 V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller or...

Page 661: ... is increased Use Case When an image failure fogging white black spots due to carrier adherence occurs at 1 1 speed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Unit V Default Value 0 Related Service Mo...

Page 662: ...is increased Use Case When an image failure fogging white black spots due to carrier adherence occurs at 1 2 speed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Unit V Default Value 0 Related Service Mod...

Page 663: ...s are alleviated but fogging is increased Use Case When an image failure fogging white black spots due to carrier adherence occurs at 1 2 speed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Unit V Defaul...

Page 664: ...aution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 128 to 128 Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment OFST PK2 1 Adj Bk color density at test print read Detail To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment full adjustment When replacing the Main Controller P...

Page 665: ...djust the default value of the color balance for Bk color when the density of Bk color varies between devices As the value is larger the image gets darker If the value is too large a transfer failure and or a fixing failure occurs Use Case Upon user s request to reduce density difference between devices Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK k...

Page 666: ...t Decrease the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging like image appears This setting is linked with Correct Density Correct Shading and Auto Correct Color Mismatch in Settings Registration Use Case When the background of a document cannot be read correctly When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Adj Set O...

Page 667: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage LD OFS M 2 Adj M low dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the set...

Page 668: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage LD OFS K 2 Adj Bk low dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the se...

Page 669: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS M 2 Adj M mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the ...

Page 670: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS K 2 Adj Bk mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the...

Page 671: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS M 2 Adj M hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the set...

Page 672: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS K 2 Adj Bk hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the se...

Page 673: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PL OFS M 2 Adj M clr low dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding t...

Page 674: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PL OFS K 2 Adj Bk clr low dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding ...

Page 675: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PM OFS M 2 Adj M clr mid dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by addin...

Page 676: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PM OFS K 2 Adj Bk clr mid dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by addi...

Page 677: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PH OFS M 2 Adj M clr hi dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding t...

Page 678: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage PH OFS K 2 Adj Bk clr hi dens area clr balance PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk color at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box a value obtained by adding ...

Page 679: ... g m2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated pape...

Page 680: ...2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper 3 ...

Page 681: ...2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper 3 ...

Page 682: ...2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper 3 ...

Page 683: ...2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper 3 ...

Page 684: ...2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper 3 ...

Page 685: ...2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper 3 ...

Page 686: ... 2 129 to 163 g m2 23 2 sided coated paper 3 164 to 220 g m2 24 2 sided coated paper 4 221 to 256 g m2 25 2 sided coated paper 5 257 to 300 g m2 26 Tracing paper 64 to 99 g m2 27 Transparency 121 to 220 g m2 28 Envelope 75 to 105 g m2 29 Postcard 164 to 220 g m2 30 Label 118 to 185 g m2 31 Pre punched paper 64 to 75 g m2 32 Bond paper 83 to 99 g m2 33 Not used Default Value 1 Related Service Mode ...

Page 687: ...environment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR P...

Page 688: ...environment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR P...

Page 689: ...setting number is applied TR DUP1 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 1 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 1 Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV1 TR PPR1 and TR DUP1 When this condition is satisfied the paper allotted voltage adjusted in TR VL1 is applied at the time of secondary transfer ...

Page 690: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP3 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 3 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 3 Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV3 TR PPR3 and TR DUP3 When this condition is satis...

Page 691: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP5 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 5 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 5 Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV5 TR PPR5 and TR DUP5 When this condition is satis...

Page 692: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP7 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 7 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 7 Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV7 TR PPR7 and TR DUP7 When this condition is satis...

Page 693: ... and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied 1TR TGY 2 Adj Y pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt 1 1 speed Detail To adjust the target current for Y color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1 1 speed Increase the value when low voltage mottled image occurs and decrease the value when fogging occurs especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge The ...

Page 694: ...y in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge The setting is reflected at the next primary transfer ATVC control Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P 1A...

Page 695: ...ue when fogging occurs especially in the 95 mm portion of the image leading edge The setting is reflected at the next primary transfer ATVC control Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute 1ATVC EX Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default Value 0 Related Servic...

Page 696: ...m only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 100 to 100 Unit mm Appropriate Target Value 40 40 Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 1ATVCTMG 2 Adj pry trns ATVC ctrl exe intvl 1 2SPD Detail To adjust the intervals the number of sheets to execute primary transfer ATVC control at 1 2 speed Decrease the value if the condition of image failure occurrence caused by primary transfe...

Page 697: ...2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper 3 ...

Page 698: ... m2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper ...

Page 699: ... m2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper ...

Page 700: ... m2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper ...

Page 701: ... m2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper ...

Page 702: ... m2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper ...

Page 703: ... m2 7 Thin paper 2 52 to 59 g m2 8 Thin paper 1 60 to 63 g m2 9 Heavy paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 10 Heavy paper 2 129 to 150 g m2 11 Heavy paper 3 151 to 163 g m2 12 Heavy paper 4 164 to 180 g m2 13 Heavy paper 5 181 to 220 g m2 14 Heavy paper 6 221 to 256 g m2 15 Heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 16 1 sided coated paper 1 106 to 128 g m2 17 1 sided coated paper 2 129 to 163 g m2 18 1 sided coated paper ...

Page 704: ...er 2 129 to 163 g m2 23 2 sided coated paper 3 164 to 220 g m2 24 2 sided coated paper 4 221 to 256 g m2 25 2 sided coated paper 5 257 to 300 g m2 26 Tracing paper 64 to 99 g m2 27 Transparency 121 to 220 g m2 28 Envelope 75 to 105 g m2 29 Postcard 164 to 220 g m2 30 Label 118 to 185 g m2 31 Pre punched paper 64 to 75 g m2 32 Bond paper 83 to 99 g m2 33 Not used Default Value 1 Related Service Mod...

Page 705: ...e environment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR...

Page 706: ...e environment occurs mottled image density loss due to excessive transfer toner scattering on solid image etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 Low humidity absolute moisture content 6 11 g m3 or less 2 Normal humidity 6 12 to 15 68 g m3 3 High humidity 15 69 g m3 or higher Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR...

Page 707: ...ller setting number is applied TR DUP9 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 9 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 9 Setting 9 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV9 TR PPR9 and TR DUP9 When this condition is satisfied the paper allotted voltage adjusted in TR VL9 is applied at the time of secondary tran...

Page 708: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP11 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 11 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 11 Setting 11 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV11 TR PPR11 and TR DUP11 When this condition i...

Page 709: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP13 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 13 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 13 Setting 13 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV13 TR PPR13 and TR DUP13 When this condition i...

Page 710: ...ditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied TR DUP15 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 15 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 15 Setting 15 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV15 TR PPR15 and TR DUP15 When this condition i...

Page 711: ... setting number is applied TR VL1 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 1 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 1 Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV1 TR PPR1 and TR DUP1 When this condition is satisfied the paper allotted voltage adjusted here is applied at the time of ...

Page 712: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL3 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 3 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 3 Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV3 TR PPR3 and TR DUP3 When ...

Page 713: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL5 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 5 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 5 Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV5 TR PPR5 and TR DUP5 When ...

Page 714: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL7 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 7 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 7 Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV7 TR PPR7 and TR DUP7 When ...

Page 715: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL9 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 9 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 9 Setting 9 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV9 TR PPR9 and TR DUP9 When ...

Page 716: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL11 2 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 11 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 11 Setting 11 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV11 TR PPR11 and TR DUP11...

Page 717: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL13 2 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 13 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 13 Setting 13 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV13 TR PPR13 and TR DUP13...

Page 718: ...e and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied Amount of Change per Unit 30 TR VL15 2 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 15 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 15 Setting 15 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV15 TR PPR15 and TR DUP15...

Page 719: ...ess OK key Caution Increase decrease the value by 1 at a time while checking the symptom Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 30 30 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV16 TR PPR16 TR DUP16 2TR OFF Supplement Memo Up to 16 combination patterns can be set in TR VL1 to 16 setting 1 to 16 When there is more than one setting where all conditions en...

Page 720: ... right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJ C...

Page 721: ...he left margin is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Displa...

Page 722: ...eft margin is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Ad...

Page 723: ...rection when feeding paper from the Multi purpose Tray As the value is changed by 1 the left margin is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate M...

Page 724: ...ng edge margin is changed by 0 1 mm Leading edge margin becomes larger An image moves downward Leading edge margin becomes smaller An image moves upward Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 LP FEED1 1 Adj pre...

Page 725: ...by 0 1 mm Increase Decrease Use Case When an image on the 1st side of paper belonging to a group of plain papers fed from the Multi purpose Tray is skewed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Group of plain papers Plain paper 1 to 3 colored paper recycled paper 1 to 3 p...

Page 726: ...ed in 2 sided mode As the value is changed by 1 the arch amount is changed by 0 1 mm Increase Decrease Use Case When an image on the 2nd side of paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed in 2 sided mode is skewed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Group of heavy ...

Page 727: ...set FCOT becomes longer Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 0 Normal 1 Increase the speed at delivery to the Second Delivery Tray 2 Reduce the speed at delivery to the First Delivery Tray 3 Reduce the speed at delivery to the First Delivery Tray and increase the speed at delivery to the Second Delivery Tray Default Value 0 LP FEED3 1 Adj pre rgst arch amount thin Casstt Detail To adjust the arch amount b...

Page 728: ... then insert the cassette 3 Check the paper level in the cassette Caution The setting is reflected after removing and then installing the cassette When the value is increased decreased greatly the actual timing may be deviated from the target Therefore change the value by 1 at a time while checking the scale Display Adj Set Range 4 to 4 Appropriate Target Value 0 Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Th...

Page 729: ...the paper level detection can be changed by adjusting the timing to detect it To increase the paper levels to display from 2 to 3 enter a positive value To decrease the paper levels to display from 3 to 2 enter a negative value Use Case Upon user s request to individually adjust the timing to switch the paper level display Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch positive negative b...

Page 730: ...reased the original tends to be detected as a text document The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the Copyboard DADF 1 path model is installed whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF reverse model is installed Use Case When adjusting the judgment level of text photo original scanned with the Scanner Unit for front side in Text Photo M...

Page 731: ...udge whether the image on the front side read with the Copyboard is color or B W at automatic color selection As the value is larger the judgment area is widened Use Case When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge whether it is a color B W image Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Dis...

Page 732: ...witch Caution When the Copyboard or DADF reverse model is installed the setting of this item is disabled Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 ACS ADJ3 1 Set ACS B W color jdgmt stdrd back side Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit for back side in ACS mode as B W color original As the value is increased the original tends to be detected as a B W document...

Page 733: ...e duplex stream reading mode decrease the value when moire on the front side is stronger than the back side and increase the value when it is weaker Use Case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 ...

Page 734: ...drum ghost occurs and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear due to charging Use Case When drum ghost occurs When horizontal lines appear due to charging Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When the value is increased horizontal lines due to charging may appear earlier When the value is decreased drum ghost may occur Disp...

Page 735: ...host occurs and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear due to charging Use Case When drum ghost occurs When horizontal lines appear due to charging Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When the value is increased horizontal lines due to charging may appear earlier When the value is decreased drum ghost may occur Display Ad...

Page 736: ...When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the Cleaning Pre exposure LED When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Use this item only when replacing the Cleaning Pre exposure LED or replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Display A...

Page 737: ... the C color Developing Unit Use Case When fogging occurs on an image after the machine has not been used for a long time Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required Time 150 sec Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR Y M K 4 STIR K 1 Stirring of Bk color developer Detail To stir ...

Page 738: ...Operate Method 1 Enter the number and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The card management information department ID and password is initialized Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2001 Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW CARD RNG INISET Y 1 Exe of Dev Unit Y initial install mod Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation o...

Page 739: ...ng automatic take up of the developer sealing 2 Dark current correction of the Registration Patch Sensor and light intensity adjustment 3 Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor C 4 Primary transfer ATVC control 5 Initialization of the Registration Patch Sensor 6 Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 7 Reset of the Developing Unit counter Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit C ...

Page 740: ...ent Memo Embedded RDS Function to send device information such as the device counter failure and consumables to the sales company s server via SOAP protocol COM TEST 1 Dspl connect result w Sales Co s server Detail To display the result of the connection test with the sales company s server Use Case When using Embedded RDS Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sur...

Page 741: ... extended function is available Use Case When the non Canon made extension function of the Embedded RDS is available Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range YYYYMMDDHHMM 12 digits YYYY Year MM Month DD Date HH Hour MM Minute Default Value 000000000000 Supplement Memo Embedded RDS Function to send device inform...

Page 742: ...nitialization of the Registration Patch Sensor 6 Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 7 Reset of the Developing Unit counter Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit Bk Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Unit of other color do not use this item Display Adj Set Range During operation xxx second r...

Page 743: ...from E RDS Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 NFC USE 1 ON OFF of NFC option Detail To set whether to enable the installed NFC option Set 1 when using the NFC option Use NFC Card Emulation is displayed in Settings Registration Use Case When in...

Page 744: ...ress of the sub line an automatically acquired gateway address is displayed When not using DHCP for acquiring the IP address of the sub line set a gateway address that is used for communication on a sub line such as a mobile router Use Case When the following two conditions are satisfied When using E RDS on a sub line of the network When not using DHCP on a sub line of the network Adj Set Operate ...

Page 745: ...Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL2 DF WLVL2 1 White level adj stream reading color Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF Use Case When replacing the Copyboard Glass When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Main Controller PCB cl...

Page 746: ...e MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value which has been backed up Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to enter the MTF values for the Scanner Unit DADF Reader in MTF M1 to 12 S1 to 12 and MTF2 M1 to 12 S1 to 12 in advance Display Adj Set Range Duri...

Page 747: ...uminance at stream reading detected with DF WLVL4 and the luminance at stream reading that the Scanner Unit for back side detected with DF WLVL4 BW TGT 1 Set of B W shading target value Detail After the white level data X Y Z for the Standard White Plate is set read the Standard White Plate and set the black and white shading target value Use Case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Ad...

Page 748: ...the time of jam removal etc Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Additional Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Clean Inside Main Unit Supplement Memo Soil may be able to be removed by executing Clean Inside Main Unit or TNR COAT execution of toner application to the Secondary Tr...

Page 749: ...key Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LED CHK KEY CHK 1 Check of key entry Detail To check the key input on the Control Panel Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel 2 Check that the input value is displayed 3 Cancel the selection to terminate checking TOUCHCHK 1 Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel Detail To a...

Page 750: ...an Detail To specify the fan to operate Use Case When replacing the fan checking the operation Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2 1 Front Fan FM01 2 Motor Fan FM03 Default Value 1 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK FAN ON Supplement Memo It is not possible to make the Power Supply Cooling Fan FM02 operate alone Check the ope...

Page 751: ...assette 3 4 Lifter Motor M102 If it is not pulled out NG is displayed Display Adj Set Range 1 to 21 1 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M07 2 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Tray Pickup Motor M13 3 Registration Motor M12 4 Duplex Reverse Motor M11 5 Duplex Merging Motor M14 6 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor M08 7 Fixing Motor 1 1 speed M09 8 Bk Drum_ITB Motor M02 CL Drum Motor M03 9 Developing...

Page 752: ...ic error code Use Case At error occurrence Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK DC CON 1 RAM clear of DC Controller PCB Detail To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Not clear the counter Use Case When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Adj...

Page 753: ...y the Main Controller PCB Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Related Service Mode COPIER COUNTER Supplement Memo See COUNTER for the target counter CNT DCON 1 Clear of DC Controller service counter Detail To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB Use Case When clearing the se...

Page 754: ...uthentication after reboot Set the login application using SMS as needed Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT Supplement Memo SMS Service Management Service An application for management which can be used on remote UI CARD 1 Clear of card ID related data Detail Operation on this item is restricted by t...

Page 755: ...l To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded RDS stored in the SRAM SCM values are ON OFF of E RDS server s port number server s SOAP URL and communication schedule with the server how often the data is acquired etc The value set by E RDS RGW PORT RGW ADR COM LOG is cleared Use Case When upgrading the Bootable in the E RDS environment Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key C...

Page 756: ...configuration of delivery options otherwise malfunction occurs After execution set the delivery destination again in Output Tray Settings in Settings Registration Use Case When changing the configuration of delivery options Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Additional Functions Mode Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Outp...

Page 757: ... JV CACHE Supplement Memo MEAP applications bundled as standard system application built in login application MEAP applications installed additionally non Canon made login application general application etc CUSTOM2 2 For customization CNT RCON 1 Clear of RCON service counter Detail To clear the service counter counted by the RCON management software Use Case When clearing the service counter coun...

Page 758: ...ion finished normally OK Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P RPT FILE HIST PRT 1 Output of jam and error logs Detail To output the jam log and error log Text data is saved in HDD as a file HIST PRT RPT TXT Use Case When outputting the jam error log Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper Display Adj Set Rang...

Page 759: ...OPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGY TGM TGC TGK1 TGY2 TGM2 TGC2 TGK2 COPIER DISPLAY HV STS 1ATVC Y M C K4 ENV PRT 1 Outpt inside temp hmdy Fix Rol temp log Detail To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log Text data is saved in HDD as a file ENV PRT RPT TXT Use Case When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine fixing temp...

Page 760: ...SB device information report Detail To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report Text data is saved in HDD as a file USBH PRT RPT TXT Use Case When outputting information of the USB device in the form of a report Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper Display Adj Set Range During operat...

Page 761: ...egistration of correction pattern 2 COLR 03 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 3 COLR 04 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 4 COLR 05 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 5 COL Auto correct...

Page 762: ... HD CLEAR HD CHECK is executed to all of the areas by selecting one of them By selecting 8 HD CLEAR HD CHECK is also executed to 7 9 11 and 17 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CLEAR HD CHECK HD CHECK 1 File system check of specified partition Detail To execute system check of the partition specified by CHK TYPE at the next startup Use Case When E602 E614 error file co...

Page 763: ...ta changes by manual or automatic adjustment When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored it is overwritten with the old setting data and the new data is deleted Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES RSRAMRES 2 Restore of Reader Unit SRAM Detail To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the Main Controller PCB Use Case When replaci...

Page 764: ...itions written in the file are set When setting a new condition is necessary read the operation setting file provided by R D from the USB memory Use Case When changing the conditions of debug log to automatically store When setting a new condition Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION DBG LOG LOG2U...

Page 765: ... the function to calculate scanning area from the specified paper size When the paper size is larger than the original size selecting ON reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger Use Case When matching the scanning area with the paper size Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF c...

Page 766: ... is detected at startup of the machine 1 Installed is set automatically Use Case When installing removing the Reader Unit Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default Value According to the setting at shipment ORG LGL 2 Special ppr size set at stream read LGL Detail To set...

Page 767: ...am reading mode Use Case Upon user s request When picking up special paper size original from DADF Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 B5 1 Korean government office paper Default Value 0 INTROT 2 1 Set auto adj exe interval last rotation Detail To set the interval the number of sheets to execute a...

Page 768: ...ge 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 MODELSZ2 2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode Detail To set whether to enable global support of original size detection at Copyboard reading Use Case Upon user s request original consists of mixed media AB Inch configuration Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The Document Size...

Page 769: ...e Chinese paper K size paper 8K 16K Use Case When using K size paper Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not supported 1 Supported Default Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ Supplement Memo 8K paper 270 x 390 mm 16K paper 270 x 195 mm ORG ...

Page 770: ... Set Range 1 to 1000 Default Value 1000 SJOB CL 1 Set of scan job canceling by logout Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the user Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caut...

Page 771: ...urn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default Value 0 PSWD SW 1 Password type set to enter service mode Detail To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode 2 types are available one for service technician and the other for system administrator service technician When selecting the type for system administra...

Page 772: ...2 INVALPDL 1 Disable of PDL license Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To disable the registered PDL license When 1 Disabled is set PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered This is set to the machines installed at convenience stores which do not allow PDL to be used Use Case When prohibiting the use of PDL Adj Set Operate...

Page 773: ...Set to allow MEAP installation by admin Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to allow the user administrator to install MEAP applications from CDS and enable iR options When 1 is set Updater can be activated from Settings Registration Use Case When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and enable iR op...

Page 774: ...urrent position at jam occurrence Use Case When user does not need automatic ejection of jammed paper When location of jammed paper is necessary to analyze the cause of a problem Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 0 JLK PWSC 2 ON OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan Detail Operation on this item is restricted by ...

Page 775: ...hm of iR ADV C series 1 Drawing algorithm of the conventional iR C series 2 3 For R D use Default Value 0 CDS LVUP 1 Set to allow CDS periodical update Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to allow the user administrator to perform periodical update linked with CDS When 1 is set setting of periodical update can be made ...

Page 776: ...Unified Authentication function because of security concern Use Case Upon user s request not to use the Unified Authentication function Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Unified Authentication A function with which it is considered that login authenticati...

Page 777: ... Memo When local CDS is used iW EMC MC device firmware update plug in is required BXSHIFT 1 Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin Detail To set whether to judge the job as a job without binding when storing a PDL job in Inbox while the binding margin is set to 0 By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while 0 is set the job is processed as without binding Booklet in Options on the Inbox screen ca...

Page 778: ...A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A7 A8 AE AF B3 B4 B8 F0 F3 Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0Cxx jam Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Display as a jam 1 Display as an error Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW JM ERR R JM ERR R 2 Set of error display of 0071 jam RCON Detail To set whether to display 0071 jam a...

Page 779: ...tainer check sequence occurs during the processing When 1 is set control to print the specified number of sheets is turned OFF and the new Toner Container check sequence is executed immediately after the replacement Use Case When downtime occurs due to the new Toner Container check sequence during the processing of a large job Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Ca...

Page 780: ...switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Keep the current firmware version 1 Update the firmware if the version in PCB option is older than that stored in the Main controller If the version is new or old and new versions are mixed firmware is not updated 2 Update the firmware regardless of whether the version is old or new if the version in PCB option differs from that stored in the Main Controller D...

Page 781: ...et Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Use User Authentication Picture Login DCONRTRY 2 Set of retry at DCON comctn error occur Detail To set whether to perform retry processing when communication error occurs between the Main Controller and the DC Controller Set 1 to 3 when E733 occurs Communication error ...

Page 782: ... Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS LVUP DSPLY SW COPIER Service mode for printer OPTION Specification setting mode DSPLY SW UI COPY 2 ON OFF of copy screen display Detail To set whether to display or hide the copy function Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ...

Page 783: ...ay Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 FXMSG SW 2 ON OFF of Fixing Unit replace message Detail To set whether to display the message prompting to replace the Fixing Unit on the Control Panel when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value When the setting values of FXMSG SW and FXWRNLVL are 1 the Fixing Unit life detection is performed When the Fixing Unit reaches its li...

Page 784: ...is ON and JAL is OFF 2 Hide when POD function is OFF and JAL is ON 3 Hide when POD function is ON and JAL is ON Default Value 1 Supplement Memo POD function JDF HOLD functions JAL function A function to save the print result as a thumbnail HPFL DSP 1 Set auto grdtn adj target select screen Detail To set how to display the adjustment target selection screen at auto gradation adjustment full adjustm...

Page 785: ...power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value It differs according to the location Additional Functions Mode Preferences Display Settings Store Location Display Settings Advanced Box Network UI MEM 2 ON OFF of memory media screen display Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set ON OFF of the memory media screen...

Page 786: ...all effect short cleaning time 2 ON moderate effect medium cleaning time 3 ON large effect long cleaning time Default Value 0 SDTM DSP 1 ON OFF of auto shutdown shift time dspl Detail To set whether to display Auto Shutdown Time and Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer in Settings Registration Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When 0 is...

Page 787: ...e Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value It differs according to the location Additional Functions Mode Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings VC HIST 2 ON OFF tiered base pricing log display Detail To set whether to display the video count logs of the tiered base pricing When 1 is set l...

Page 788: ...power switch Caution When the Inner Finisher is installed delivery operation of large paper 257 to 300 g m2 differs depending on whether the 3 Way Unit is installed When the 3 Way Unit is installed paper is delivered to the Second Delivery Tray of the Inner Finisher When the 3 Way Unit is not installed job is canceled Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mod...

Page 789: ...ding to the location Related Service Mode Service Mode Updater Install Data Backup Service Additional Functions Mode Management Settings License Other Register Update Software Install Data Backup Service LF DSP S 2 Set Display Hide Life VL in Service Mode Detail To set whether to display Life Value and Replacement Life Value on the service mode counter screen If this option is set to 1 Life Value ...

Page 790: ...main power switch Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after recovering from the problem Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Normal print operation 1 Print with original data without image processing Default Value 0 IFAX LIM 2 No of max print lines at IFAX reception Detail To set the maximum number of lines for e mail text to be printed when receiving IFAX Setting of this item can prevent endless...

Page 791: ...e Representation Access To restrict use of CRAM MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 SMTP server dependent 1 Not used Default Value 0 Supplement Memo SMTP authentication Protocol in which user authentication f...

Page 792: ...od 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 SMTP server dependent 1 Not used Default Value 0 Supplement Memo SMTP authentication Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP which is the protocol to be used for e mail transmission At the time of e mail transmission this protocol executes authentication of ...

Page 793: ...uest Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected Otherwise you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP authentication application is running Port 8080 is reserved for redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side Display Adj Set Range 1 to 65535 Default Value 8000 ME...

Page 794: ...umber of target characters in e mail body text is increased by 1 character Use Case When reducing print of blank paper due to e mail received by IFAX Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no print of e mail body text if the number of characters is less th...

Page 795: ...802XTOUT 1 Set of IEEE802 1X authentication timeout Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set timeout value for IEEE802 1X authentication If the device executes 802 1X authentication change the wait time for response from the authentication server Use Case When response from the authentication server is slow fast Adj Set Operate Met...

Page 796: ...eration on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set the event notification reception port of a fax client Use Case When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Default Value 29400 Related Se...

Page 797: ...se Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 5 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 2 to 5 Not used Default Value 0 PFWFTPRT 1 Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from a s...

Page 798: ... Value 0 Supplement Memo NGN Next Generation Network URI Uniform Resource Identifier SIPREGPR 2 Setting of registrar server use protocol Detail To set the protocol used for communication with registrar server Although the protocol that is the same as the one for proxy server is usually used another protocol can be used in accordance with user and environment Use Case Upon user s request to use a p...

Page 799: ...only 2 Open HTTPS port 443 8443 only Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Use HTTP Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings Use TLS SSLSTRNG 2 Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL Detail To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL When 1 is set weak encryption algorithm cannot be used Use Case When prohibiting weak encryption a...

Page 800: ...hod 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Open the specific port 1 Open all ports Default Value 0 RAW PORT 2 For customization LINKWAKE 2 Set of deep sleep recovery at link up Detail To set whether to recover from deep sleep when link up disconnection and then connection of LAN cable is detected Set 0 if the closest hub o...

Page 801: ... Specification setting mode ENV SET ENVP INT 1 Temp hmdy Fix Film temp log get cycle Detail To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Film As the value is incremented by 1 the cycle is increased by 1 minute Collected log can be displayed in COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT Use Case At problem analysis Adj Set Operate Method 1 E...

Page 802: ... 1 to 7 Not used 8 8 hours 60 60 hours Unit hour Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 INTRTMPL 2 Set initial rotn extsn condtn low temp Detail To set temperature inside the machine and process speed that are the conditions to extend the initial rotation time at low temperature Use Case When black lines in vertical scanning direction appear at approx 30 mm from the image leading edge Adj Set...

Page 803: ...Way Unit is not installed FCOT becomes longer Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 When the 3 Way Unit is installed 0 Normal 1 2 Pass through the large path at 2 sided feed When the 3 Way Unit is not installed 0 Normal 1 30 seconds 2 60 seconds Default Value 0 CLD REV 2 Set reverse rotation Photo s Drum stop Detail To set whether to rotate the CL Drum Motor reversely when the Photosensitive Drum Y M C is ...

Page 804: ...band for preventing flipping of the ITB Cleaning Blade Increase the value when noise comes from the ITB due to the flipping If the length of toner band gets longer flipping can be prevented but toner consumption is increased When 0 is set toner band is not formed Use Case When noise comes from the ITB When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj Set Operate Method...

Page 805: ...becomes shorter In addition the machine becomes sensitive to change in temperature and the control is executed even with B W image Color displacement is less likely to occur but productivity is decreased Use Case When color displacement occurs frequently Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When 1 is set productivity is decreased Display Adj Set Range 0 to 4...

Page 806: ... 7 257 to 300 g m2 coated paper 4 5 221 to 300 g m2 and custom size envelope 2 ON only for heavy paper 1 to 7 106 to 300 g m2 coated paper 4 5 221 to 300 g m2 reply 4 on 1 postcard and standard custom size envelope 3 ON only for heavy paper 7 257 to 300 g m2 and coated paper 1 to 5 106 to 300 g m2 4 ON only for heavy paper 1 to 7 106 to 300 g m2 coated paper 1 to 5 106 to 300 g m2 reply 4 on 1 pos...

Page 807: ... Change per Unit 5 FIX ROT 1 Set idle rotn stop temp after s ppr feed Detail Temperature on the edges of the Fixing Film becomes higher than the temperature at the center when feeding large size paper after small size paper through the Fixing Unit Idle rotation is executed until temperature is decreased to the specified value after feeding small size paper to prevent occurrence of fixing offset or...

Page 808: ...ting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 5 to 1000 Unit sheet Default Value 100 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION IMG SPD ARC INT2 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ARC INT2 2 Set ARCDAT ctrl exe intvl last rotation Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute ARCDAT control at lost rotation ARCDAT control is not executed at paper interval while feeding the specified num...

Page 809: ... a result of dust detection correction control In that case dust detection is not performed Use Case When black line occurs due to dust Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution In the case of DADF reverse model note the following points If the value is too large a fine image portion may be unclear If the ...

Page 810: ...ny value other than 0 while the values of DFDST L1 and DFDST L2 are 0 the value of DFDST L2 is returned to the previous value a value before setting 0 When setting 0 for DFDST L2 the value of DFDST L1 also become 0 automatically image correction is not performed Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 0 OFF Default Value 200 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L1 Supplement Memo With the dust ...

Page 811: ...ob after power on reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be least detected IMG MCON COPIER Service mode for printer OPTION Specification setting mode IMG MCON PASCAL 1 Set of auto gradation adjustment data Detail To set the gradation adjustment data that is used at image formation When 0 is set the initial LUT is used When 1 is set the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generate...

Page 812: ... Bk color Use Case When moire occurs or jaggy is significant in case of printing an image containing many halftone dots or photos When avoiding to replace the processed black with single Bk color Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 High ...

Page 813: ...Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Adjust Toner Amount at Color Printing TMIC BK 2 ON OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct Detail To set ON OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and for copy which are used by TMIC When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON the density of the high density area becomes high and consequently text and thin lines become clear While an i...

Page 814: ...OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 0 Equivalent to PDL text mode Black text is reproduced with 4 colors Error diffused image The hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2 1 Equivalent to PDL photo mode Black text is reproduced with 4 colors Screen processed image 2 Equivalent to scanned text mode Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color Error diffused image T...

Page 815: ...ng Film When setting 1 for IMGC ADJ this setting can be also made in Adjust Toner Volume Used for Color Printing in Settings Registration Use Case Upon user s request When reflecting the color adjustment value to an image precisely Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 0 is set toner scattering in the transfer sectio...

Page 816: ...g in the normal operation Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 CS 680 Except for USA and EU Mainly for Japan 2 Canon Multipurpose Paper For USA 3 Oce RED Label80 For EU Default Value It differs according to the location AST SEL 2 Adj of advanced smoothing effect Detail To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced smoothing UI Set 3 if no smoothing effect is obtained even though High is se...

Page 817: ...nment only 2 ON all environments Default Value 0 AUTO DH 1 Set Dmax Dhalf ctrl exe cndtn wrmup rtn Detail To set the condition to additionally execute D max D half control at warm up rotation after the machine is not used for 8 hours or more When 0 is set additional execution of D max D half control is not performed When 1 is set additional execution is performed only in an HH high temperature and...

Page 818: ...e printing low duty images images with low image ratio When graininess coarseness or low density occurs When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 2 to 4 2 1 0 1 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 5 2 1 0 3 1 5 4 2 0 Unit Default Value 0 DELV THC 2 Set image ratio for C ...

Page 819: ...ivity is decreased and toner consumption is increased As the value is decreased productivity and toner consumption are improved but coarseness gets worse Use Case While printing low duty images images with low image ratio When graininess coarseness or low density occurs When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch ...

Page 820: ...justment Caution Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment after the setting is done Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 DMX OF M 2 Adj of M color D max target density Detail To adjust the target density of D max control in the case where density of solid area on M color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed Increase the value when the...

Page 821: ...increased white spots or uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference on a solid image is alleviated Use Case When image failures ring marks white spots uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference occur Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Caution If the value is too ...

Page 822: ...er the setting value and then press OK key Caution Productivity is decreased at continuous feeding Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 OFF 1 ON only under the specific conditions 2 ON Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV THY THM THC THK IMG FIX COPIER Service mode for printer OPTION Specification setting mode IMG FIX FX S TMP 1 Set ITOP control temp plain 1 Detail To set the ...

Page 823: ...when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on heavy paper 2 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large fixing offset may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 de...

Page 824: ...ure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on envelope Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS TMP2 1 Set ITOP control temp heavy paper...

Page 825: ...ng failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper ...

Page 826: ...Use Case When fixing failure occurs in an environment where a temperature is lower than 10 deg C Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 20 Unit sec Default Value 0 Supplement Memo When all the following conditions are satisfied it becomes 1 1 speed Paper type Thin paper plain paper 1 to 3 colored paper r...

Page 827: ...emperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on plain paper 2 colored paper tracing paper and pre punched paper Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 d...

Page 828: ... a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on coated paper 2 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large fixing offset may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 ...

Page 829: ...changed by 5 deg C Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven g...

Page 830: ... 52 to 63 g m2 at 1 1 speed Increase the value when an image failure crawled marks wrinkles occurs Use Case When an image failure crawled marks wrinkles occurs with thin paper Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 0 mm 1 15 mm 0 35 mm 1 60 mm 2 85 mm Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Image failure crawled marks ...

Page 831: ...ure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on plain paper 3 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occurs when setting an extreme value Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 ...

Page 832: ... value when uneven gloss occurs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is ...

Page 833: ...e occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner doe...

Page 834: ...e Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner does not peel off Display Adj Set Range 2 t...

Page 835: ...f paper Toner does not peel off Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 FXS TM18 1 Set ITOP control temp extra long hvy 1 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for extra long heavy paper 1 to 7 coated paper 1 to 5 and label width 300 to 305 mm As the value is changed by 1 the control temp...

Page 836: ...r coated paper 3 164 to 220 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on coated paper 3 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too l...

Page 837: ...ease the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on extra long heavy paper 1 to 7 coated paper 1 to 5 and label Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large fixing offset may occur If the value is too small a fixing fai...

Page 838: ... punched paper and bond paper at 1 2 speed As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on plain paper etc at 1 2 speed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Displ...

Page 839: ...ixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of pap...

Page 840: ... when uneven gloss occurs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 74 mm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too sm...

Page 841: ...Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on heavy paper 6 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large fixing offset may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur Display Adj Set Range 2 to ...

Page 842: ...nd decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on coated paper 5 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large fixing offset may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 ...

Page 843: ...perature control rotation stop and disengagement of the Fixing Pressure Roller and the Fixing Film CUSTOM COPIER Service mode for printer OPTION Specification setting mode CUSTOM TEMP TBL 1 Set fixing control temp plain 1 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 64 to 75 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the val...

Page 844: ...rate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 00000000 DEV SP2 2 Device special settings 2 Detail To execute the device special setting Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main...

Page 845: ...de only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 00000000 DEV SP8 2 Device special settings 8 Detail To execute the device special setting Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 111...

Page 846: ...tail To execute the device special setting Use Case For customization Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 0 RDEV SP5 2 RCON device special settings 5 Detail To execute the device special setting Use Case For ...

Page 847: ... QS 2 For customization TIFFJPEG 2 For customization DCM EXCL 1 For customization FPOT MD 2 For customization USER COPIER Service mode for printer OPTION Specification setting mode USER COPY LIM 1 Setting of upper limit for copy Detail To set the upper limit value for copy Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main pow...

Page 848: ...o 999 0 No registration Default Value It differs according to the location COUNTER3 1 Setting of software counter 3 Detail To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen Use Case Upon user dealer s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 0 No registration Default Value ...

Page 849: ...in power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 YYMM DD 1 DD MMYY 2 MM DD YY Default Value It differs according to the location Additional Functions Mode Preferences Timer Energy Settings Date Time Settings MB CCV 2 Control card usage limit for Mail Box Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To restrict use of control card for Mail Box U...

Page 850: ...e Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Long length paper is delivered from the Second Delivery Outlet excluding delivery from the Inner Finisher Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Copy Options Supplement Memo Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used CNT DISP 2 Display h...

Page 851: ... 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job 1 Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is delivered all 2 Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered all For all jobs Default Value 0 TAB ROT 1 Set of landscape img rotn at P...

Page 852: ... command that is specified for each page to control on a page basis 1 Control method of non Canon made PCL handling the value of COPIES command which is specified for page 1 at the time of Collate mode as bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or later is invalid Same control applies as Canon made PCL at the time of non sorted mode 2 to 65535 For future use Default Value 0...

Page 853: ...Function Settings Copy Select Color Settings for Copy Use Auto Color Black White DFLT BOX 1 Setting of color mode for Mail Box scan Detail To set the default color mode for Mail Box scan operation To reflect the change it is necessary to initialize the default settings of scan and store function in the screen displayed by pressing Scan in the main menu with one of the following methods Settings Re...

Page 854: ...on ratio for SEND transmission is set to High Rati As the value is larger the compression ratio is higher the file size becomes small Use Case When making the transmission file size smaller Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution As the value is larger image quality is decreased Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Compression ra...

Page 855: ...s of MEAP failure can be obtained Use Case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource confliction between MEAP applications service registration or use order Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Normal mode 1 Safe mode Default Value 0 PRNT POS 2 ON O...

Page 856: ...ue 0 PS MODE 2 Setting of PS print line drawing Detail To set the image processing at PS print Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is set Use Case Use case When right and left ruled lines are different in width Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 t...

Page 857: ...et Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Single color counter 1 Full color counter Default Value It differs according to the location JA FUNC 2 Display of job archive function ON OFF Detail To display ON OFF of job archive function Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving Use Case...

Page 858: ... Supplement Memo LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Registering LDAP server enables to search e mail address etc from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book etc Registration is available by the following Set Destination Register LDAP Server FROM OF 1 Deletion of mail sender s address Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Re...

Page 859: ... Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution To restrict addresses for transmission be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Allowed 1 Prohibited Default Value 0 LDAP DEF 1 Initial condtn set of LDAP server search Detail To set initial condition for ...

Page 860: ...ng the charging system Even without the hardware switch the mode can be switched with the software switch when it is set to display the Use Charge Management screen in Settings Registration Use Case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily canceling the charging system Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power s...

Page 861: ...ress OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Management Settings Data Management HDD Data Complete Deletion Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion BWCL DSP 2 ON OFF of color B W selection screen Detail To set whether to display the color B W selection screen to select the default of the color mode Use Case When displayi...

Page 862: ...hen press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When setting 0 be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device CTCHKDSP 1 Display hide of counter print Detail To set whether to display or hide Print List...

Page 863: ...tion Access To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set the direct fax transmission is enabled Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA REP 2 Setting of TX Report w...

Page 864: ...from the scan preview screen at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set a page is deleted from the scan preview screen Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA PULL 2 Setting of network scan SAM Deta...

Page 865: ... Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA RUI 2 Setting of Inbox document access SAM Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is enabled Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at th...

Page 866: ...Use Case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value 0 Supplement Memo If selecting service mode data as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD EXPT to 1 service mode data can be exported SNDSTREN 1 Set of ...

Page 867: ...the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF Display 1 ON Hide Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION ACC COIN PRTDP SW 1 Set delivery side for 1 page job 2 sided Detail To set whether to deliver paper face up or face down when printing only 1 page although 2 sided print is set When 0 is set paper is delivered face down ...

Page 868: ...on is disabled Set 1 when using the conventional secured print function when the EFI Controller is connected etc The PPA function is disabled When IMG CONT is set to 3 or 4 for connecting the EFI Controller the setting of this item becomes 1 When this item is set to 0 the setting of UI PPA becomes 1 When this item is set to 1 the setting of UI PPA becomes 0 Use Case When using the conventional sec...

Page 869: ... Default Value 100 VC LOW 2 Tiered base pricing cntr Low thrshld Detail To set the threshold value for the tiered base pricing counter Low To enter the value 10 times higher than the estimated video count value Video count correction value lower than the value setting value x 0 1 is judged as Low As the value is changed by 1 the threshold is changed by 0 1 Use Case According to the usage of the us...

Page 870: ...placing paper on the Multi purpose Tray 1 The setting of Preferences Paper Settings Multi Purpose Tray Defaults is Fixed 2 The job type is PDL 3 The setting value of this service mode is 1 4 Paper is placed at occurrence of no paper on the Multi Purpose Tray Use Case Upon user s request Use this item for customization for Aeon during application of service mode Adj Set Operate Method Enter the set...

Page 871: ...INSTDTST INSTDT M 1 Register installation date info month Detail To set the information on the installation date month Use Case At installation When replacing the HDD Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 12 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INSTDTST INSTDT D 1 Register installation date info day Detail To set the...

Page 872: ...specs Detail To switch the percentage of increments in which the remaining level of consumables is shown at their near end Use Case When the remaining level of toner or waste toner is suddenly displayed as 0 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn ON OFF the Main Power Caution The default value is properly set according to the country and the model and thus sh...

Page 873: ...ttings Paper Settings A5R STMTR Paper Selection CST4 P1 1 Setting of Cst4 paper size A5R STMTR Detail To set the paper size A5R STMTR used in the Cassette 4 Use Case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 A5R 1 STMTR Default Value 0 Additional Functions ...

Page 874: ...the location where K size paper can be selected in the Control Panel menu For other locations only EXEC can be set Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When K size paper cannot be selected in the Control Panel menu only the setting value 0 can be set Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 EXEC 1 16K Default Value 0 Supplement Memo 16K pa...

Page 875: ...ences Network TCP IP Settings FTP Print Settings Use FTP Printing OFF Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPP Print Settings ON Preferences Network SMB Server Settings SMB Printer Settings Use SMB ON Function Settings Send E mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings SMTP Receive POP OFF Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 4 from 0 to 2 when setting 4 The change ...

Page 876: ...band 16 sheets when a cover is included Default Value 3 OUT TRAY 1 Presence absence of Third Delivery Tray Detail To set whether the Third Delivery Tray is installed or not When it is installed set 1 Use Case When the Third Delivery Tray is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not install...

Page 877: ...iss Franc Dollar by going through the following COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT PRC entry is in fractional unit Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents 0 50 Use Case At installation of Coin Manager Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Display Adj Set Range 0 to...

Page 878: ...imit number of sheets With priority on the upper limit number of sheets processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default Value 0 PDL THR 2 ON OFF PDL print external charge mode Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict S...

Page 879: ...e initial screen displays the copy screen and selecting No Charge displays the main menu after authentication Use Case At installation of Coin Manager Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When setting 1 be sure to set COIN to 4 in advance If COIN AUT is set first it is necessary to make the settings in the following orde...

Page 880: ... Adj Set Range 1 to 999 1 Not yet connected 400 to 499 EFI print server 600 to 699 Creo print server 700 to 799 Oce print server Default Value 1 VTRNS TO 2 For R D LCNS TR COPIER Service mode for printer OPTION Specification setting mode LCNS TR ST SEND 2 Installation state dspl of SEND function Detail To display installation state of SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license ...

Page 881: ...transferring the license Use Case When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST SPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR SPDF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR SPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Searchable ...

Page 882: ...Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PDFDR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PDFDR Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SCR 2 Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print Detail To display installa...

Page 883: ...are when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST VNC 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR VNC Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR VNC 2 ...

Page 884: ...display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST HRPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR HRPDF Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST TRSND 2 Install state dspl Trial SEND function Detail To display installation s...

Page 885: ... the license Use Case When checking whether Time Stamp PDF JP only is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST TSPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR TSPDF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR TSPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF ...

Page 886: ...se key to use Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST DVPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR DVPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SCPDF 2 Install state dspl of Trace Smoo...

Page 887: ...ction is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST ERDS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR ERDS Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment Supplement Memo Monitoring service function A function to send charge counter to the non Canon made charge serv...

Page 888: ...license key to use PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PCL 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PCL Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST PSLI5 2 Install state dspl PS LIPS4 LIPS LX JP Detail To display installation state of PS LIPS4 LIPS LX func...

Page 889: ...tion JP only when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether LIPS4 function JP only is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST LIPS4 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR LIPS4 Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment...

Page 890: ...ransfer license key to use PCL UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PCLUF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PCLUF Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST PSLIP 2 Install state dspl of PS LIPS4 func JP Detail To display installation state of PS...

Page 891: ...on when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether UFR II function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST LXUFR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR LXUFR Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR LXUFR 2 Trns ...

Page 892: ...il To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST JBLK 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR JBLK Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST AFAX 2 Installation state display of Remote Fax Detail To display installatio...

Page 893: ...XML when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether Office Open XML is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST OOXML 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR OOXML Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR OOXML 2 Trns...

Page 894: ...c Detail To display transfer license key to use IEEE2600 1 security function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST 2600 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR 2600 Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST OPFNT 2 Install state display of PCL Font Set Detail To displ...

Page 895: ... of IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When checking whether IPFAX is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST IPFAX 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR IPFAX Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value 0 TR IPFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of IPFAX Detail T...

Page 896: ...il To display transfer license key to use MS Office direct function when disabling and then transferring the license Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST OFIC 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR OFIC Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SMLG 2 Install state dspl of picture login func Detail To display inst...

Page 897: ...ut Report PCL Font List TR FRWEB 2 Trn lcns key dspl Web Access SW free ver Detail To display transfer license key to use the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the license of it Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST FRWEB 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR FRWEB Dis...

Page 898: ...zation SP B03 2 For customization SP B04 2 For customization SP B05 2 For customization SP B06 2 For customization SP B07 2 For customization SP B08 2 For customization SP B09 2 For customization SP B10 2 For customization SP B11 2 For customization SP B12 2 For customization SP B13 2 For customization SP B14 2 For customization SP B15 2 For customization SP B16 2 For customization SP B17 2 For cu...

Page 899: ...zation SP B48 2 For customization SP B49 2 For customization SP B50 2 For customization SP B51 2 For customization SP B52 2 For customization SP B53 2 For customization SP B54 2 For customization SP B55 2 For customization SP B56 2 For customization SP B57 2 For customization SP B58 2 For customization SP B59 2 For customization SP B60 2 For customization SP B61 2 For customization SP B62 2 For cu...

Page 900: ...zation SP V09 2 For customization SP V10 2 For customization SP V11 2 For customization SP V12 2 For customization SP V13 2 For customization SP V14 2 For customization SP V15 2 For customization SP V16 2 For customization SP V17 2 For customization SP V18 2 For customization SP V19 2 For customization SP V20 2 For customization SP V21 2 For customization SP V22 2 For customization SP V23 2 For cu...

Page 901: ...zation SP V50 2 For customization SP V51 2 For customization SP V52 2 For customization SP V53 2 For customization SP V54 2 For customization SP V55 2 For customization SP V56 2 For customization SP V57 2 For customization SP V58 2 For customization SP V59 2 For customization SP V60 2 For customization SP V61 2 For customization SP V62 2 For customization SP V63 2 For customization SP V64 2 For cu...

Page 902: ...the warning when consumables consumable parts are not automatically delivered Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value The value differs according to the location TONER C 1 Dspl hide Toner C preparation warning Detail To switch between display hide the preparation warning on the Control Panel Status Bar Use Cas...

Page 903: ... warning on the Control Panel Status Bar Use Case In the case of displaying the warning when consumables consumable parts are not automatically delivered Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value The value differs according to the location PT DR C 1 Display hide Drum U C prepare warning Detail To switch between ...

Page 904: ...ording to the location PT DR C 1 Dspl hide Drum U C Replacement message Detail To switch between display hide the Replacement message on the Control Panel Status Bar Use Case When a non technical person will replace the drum unit Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value The value differs according to the locati...

Page 905: ...ith the instruction of the sales company HQ Display Adj Set Range 0 to 365 Default Value The value differs according to the location TONER K 1 Set days left before Toner Bk prep warn Detail To set the timing number of days left at which the preparation warning will be displayed Use Case When changing the timing number of days left at which the preparation warning will be displayed Adj Set Operate ...

Page 906: ...ate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Change the setting in accordance with the instruction of the sales company HQ Display Adj Set Range 0 to 365 Default Value The value differs according to the location FX REP 1 For R D DF REP 1 For R D PM DLV D COPIER Service mode for printer OPTION Specification setting mode PM DLV D TONER Y 1 Set Toner Y prior alarm notice timing De...

Page 907: ...1 to 365 1 The alarm not issued Default Value It differs according to the location PT DR M 1 Set Drum U M prior alarm notice timing Detail To set the number of days left before the prior notification alarm will be notified Use Case When changing the timing to notify the prior notification alarm Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 365 1 Th...

Page 908: ... 10 MCYBk horizontal stripes 11 For R D use 12 YMCBk 64 gradations 13 For R D use 14 Full color 16 gradations 15 to 100 For R D use Default Value 0 TXPH 1 Setting of test print image mode Detail To set the image mode at the time of test print output This mode is enabled for test print only Use Case At problem analysis Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj...

Page 909: ...YPE 5 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 128 DENS C 1 Adj of C color density at test print Detail To adjust C color density when performing test print TYPE 5 As the value is larger the image gets darker Use Case At test print TYPE 5 Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Ran...

Page 910: ...etting of Bk color output at test print Detail To set whether to output Bk color at the time of test print The setting is applied to all types When setting COLOR K to 1 and COLOR Y M C to 0 a single Bk color is output Use Case At test print Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not output 1 Output Default Value 1 Related Service Mode CO...

Page 911: ...e 1 Amount of Change per Unit 1 FINISH 1 Accessory processing function test print Detail To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function Use Case When checking operation of accessory processing function Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the number of sheets for PG QTY and then press OK key 2 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 3 Press Start button The machine outputs a t...

Page 912: ...ion of NIC replace NIC Display Adj Set Range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 At normal state OK At failure occurrence NG Supplement Memo Remote host address IP address of PC terminal in network Loopback address 127 0 0 1 Checking TCP IP of this machine is available because the signal is returned before NIC NIC Network interface Local host address IP address of this machine BML DISP 2 Set System Monitor...

Page 913: ...etwork packet capture Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Related Service Mode COPIER TEST NET CAP Additional Functions Mode Store Network Packet Log PONSTART 2 Set network packet capture start timing Detail To set whether to perform network packet capture from power on Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Ra...

Page 914: ... the USB flash drive Use Case At problem analysis at packet data analysis When improving security of written packet data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB flash drive Even when the packet data is loaded using SST the file is specified therefore the setting is d...

Page 915: ...position Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position Thus handle it with care Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 0 OFF 20 Before registration 1st side 21 Before registration 2nd side 1 30 Before fixing 1st side 31 Before fixing 2nd side 1 32 After fixing 1st side 33 After fixing 2nd side 1 40 Second delivery 1st side 2 41 Second delivery 2nd side 1 2 70 Reverse position 1 1 4 ...

Page 916: ... delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at FAX reception Large size 1 Small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 BOX PRT 1 Inbox print counter Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print Large size 1 Small size 1 A blank sheet is...

Page 917: ...per Unit 1 C2 1 Cassette 2 pickup total counter Detail Total pickup counter value of the Cassette 2 Large size 1 Small size 1 Use Case When checking the counter Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 C3 1 Cassette 3 pickup total counter Detail Total pickup counter value of the Cassette 3 Large size 1 Small size 1 Use Case ...

Page 918: ...ate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 FEEDER COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode FEEDER FEED 1 DADF original pickup total counter Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the DADF Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Defaul...

Page 919: ...y Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 SORTER 1 Finisher total jam counter Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the Finisher Use Case When checking the jam counter Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 2 SID...

Page 920: ...Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C3 1 Cassette 3 jam counter Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 3 Upper Cassette of the 2 cassette Pedestal Use Case When checking the jam counter Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value ...

Page 921: ... counter Detail To count up the number of C color toner supply blocks with each half turn of the Toner Container Use Case When checking the usage status of toner Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit block Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 T SPLY K 1 Bk color toner supply counter Detail To count up the number of Bk color toner supply blocks with...

Page 922: ...r R D SWG RL 1 For R D FIN RBLT 1 For R D JOB COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode JOB DVPAPLEN 1 For R D DVRUNLEN 1 For R D DRBL 1 COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode DRBL 1 TR UNIT 1 ITB Unit parts counter Detail ITB Unit 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts ...

Page 923: ... the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 2TR ROLL 1 Sec Transfer Out...

Page 924: ...ct the item enter the value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DV UNT Y 1 Developing Unit Y parts counter Detail Developing Unit Y 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To cl...

Page 925: ...he consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C1 SP RL 1 Cassette 1 Separat...

Page 926: ...alue Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ...

Page 927: ...value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1...

Page 928: ...stimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Cha...

Page 929: ...mated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change...

Page 930: ...ife value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Un...

Page 931: ...Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 PT DR C 1...

Page 932: ...unter is advanced separately from Bk 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the co...

Page 933: ...erate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DRBL 2 COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode DRBL 2 DF PU RL 1 Pickup Roll...

Page 934: ...r value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 9...

Page 935: ...sette 3 Pickup Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value aft...

Page 936: ...alue Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ...

Page 937: ...mated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Un...

Page 938: ... line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Ch...

Page 939: ...he previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit t...

Page 940: ...from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit t...

Page 941: ...is fed Amount of Change per Unit 1 T CNTR COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode T CNTR YELLOW 1 For R D MAGENTA 1 For R D CYAN 1 For R D BLACK 1 For R D MISC2 COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode MISC2 APW TIME 2 For R D CPW TIME 2 For R D BAT TIME 2 For R D FUSE CNT 2 For R D SPW TIME 2 For R D PAPER COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode PAPER G52 59 ...

Page 942: ... 1st line The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G91 105 1 Delivered sheet counter 91 to ...

Page 943: ...80 g m2 1st line The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G181 220 1 Delivered sheet counte...

Page 944: ...eets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G326 350 1 Delivered sheet counter 326 to 350 g m2 Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 326 to 350 g m2 1st line The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large si...

Page 945: ...rd column Life Value 4th column Replacement Life Value Use Case When checking Life VL No of days left Display Adj Set Range 1st column 0 to 999 2nd column 0 to 999 days 3rd column 0 to 999 4th column 50 to 999 Supplement Memo Operation Life Value Wear level value relative to Replacement Life Value Operation Life Value Life Value Replacement Life Valuex100Number of Days Left Expected number of days...

Page 946: ...er of days left of Waste Toner Container The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country 1st column Operation Life Value 2nd column Number of Days Left 3rd column Life Value 4th column Replacement Life Value Use Case When checking Life VL No of days left Adj Set Operate Method To reset Operation Life Value Number of Days Left Life Value Select the item and then press Clear key Cauti...

Page 947: ...Left Expected number of days until the part reaches its end of life Replacement Life Value Target replacement life value PT DR M 1 Drum Unit M Life VL No of days left Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit M The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country 1st column Operation Life Value 2nd column Number of Days Left 3rd column Life Value 4th colum...

Page 948: ...arget replacement life value PT DRM 1 Drum Unit Bk Life VL No of days Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit Bk The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country 1st column Operation Life Value 2nd column Number of Days Left 3rd column Life Value 4th column Replacement Life Value Use Case When checking Life VL No of days left of the part At parts rep...

Page 949: ...COPIER Service mode for printer COUNTER Counter mode LIFE DF PR PD 1 For R D 8 Service Mode 927 ...

Page 950: ...e of an image is still missing after adjustment of A4 paper width 297 0 mm with TRY A4 the original width may be larger than 297 1 mm Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJUST Adjustment mode FEEDER ADF service mode ADJUST Adjustment mode DOCST 1 Adj image lead edge margin stream read Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the front side at stream reading Execute this item when the ou...

Page 951: ...er PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is reduced by 0 1 mm The image moves upward Use Case When installing DADF When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Un...

Page 952: ...thod Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 10 to 10 Unit Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 FUNCTION Operation inspection mode FEEDER ADF service mode FUNCTION Operation inspection mode MTR CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation motor Detail To specify the motor of DADF to operate The motor is activated by MTR ON Use Case At operat...

Page 953: ...ckup delivery operation with stamp 3 Not used DADF reverse model 0 1 sided pickup delivery operation 1 2 sided pickup delivery operation 2 1 sided pickup delivery operation with stamp 3 2 sided pickup delivery operation with stamp Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION FEED ON CL CHK 1 Specifying DADF Operation Clutch Detail To specify the DADF Clutch to be operated The Clutch is activated by CL ON ...

Page 954: ...y is pressed STOP is not displayed Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION FAN CHK SL CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation solenoid Detail To specify the solenoid of DADF to operate The solenoid is activated by SL ON Use Case At operation check Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 DADF 1 path model 0 Stamp Solenoid SL1 1 Not used DADF reve...

Page 955: ...Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION FEED CHK OPTION Specification setting mode FEEDER ADF service mode OPTION Specification setting mode R ATM 1 Set DADF dble fd dtct H land mode 1 path Detail To set the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF 1 path model to the highland mode Set 1 if the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters U...

Page 956: ...r the value of service label Use Case When the staple position in front rear direction is displaced at front 1 stapling When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 30 to 30 Unit...

Page 957: ... data enter the value of service label Use Case When paper displacement occurs on the first and second sheets of a paper stack in the Buffer Assembly When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Displ...

Page 958: ...lue is changed by 1 the fold position is moved by 0 1 mm Moves in the left direction of the spread Moves in the right direction of the spread When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and...

Page 959: ... changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ST ALG2 1 Adj Stacker LTR align pstn Fin AA1 Detail To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position of the Process Tray As the value is changed by 1 position of the Alignment Plate is moved by 0 1 mm Inward Outward When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB clearing RAM data ent...

Page 960: ...earing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When the staple position in front rear direction is displaced at front 1 stapling When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set...

Page 961: ...ution The life of staple free binding unit becomes shorter when increasing the setting value Display Adj Set Range 15 to 15 Unit mNm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 FR STP X 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn Fd way Fin K1 Detail To adjust the staple position in feed direction at staple free stapling As the value is changed by 1 the staple position is moved by 0 1 mm Toward inlet direction Towa...

Page 962: ...r PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Fin AA1 To adjust the height of the Return Belt when papers 65 sheets are stacked on the Process Tray As the value is changed by 1 the height of the Return Belt is changed by 0 1 mm Move down Move up When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When paper alignment is poor When replac...

Page 963: ... alignment position A4 Fin K1 Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning A4 paper As the value is incremented by 1 distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0 1 mm Use Case When the paper alignment position is displaced When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and...

Page 964: ...to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode SORTER ADJUST INF ALG1 Supplement Memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER ADJUST INF ALG1 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 CENT ALG 1 Adj ctr align standard pstn Fin K1 AA1 Detail To adjust the reference position for center alignment As the value is changed by 1 the reference position is moved by 0 1 mm Toward rear Toward front Use Case Whe...

Page 965: ... of Saddle Stitcher when using thin paper less than 64 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the fold position is moved by 0 1 mm Moves in the left direction of the spread Moves in the right direction of the spread Use Case When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher for thin paper is displaced Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Ad...

Page 966: ...ultaneous stack delivery operation is performed the delivery speed does not change Make the setting whether to perform buffer operation with BUFF SW Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Unit mm s Default Value 0 Related Service Mode SORTER OPTION BUFF SW Amount of Change per Unit 10 RBLT PS2 1 Adj of Return Belt height 2 Fin AA1 Detail To adjust the height of the Return Belt when aligning papers on the Pr...

Page 967: ...e amount is not changed by entering 1 Display Adj Set Range 1 to 1 1 Shift amount is 5 mm decreased 0 Initial setting 1 Not used Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 5 RBLT PS3 1 Adj of Return Belt height 3 Fin AA1 Detail To adjust the height of the Return Belt when stacking the 1 sheet on the processing tray As the value is changed by 1 the height of the return belt changes by angle ...

Page 968: ...o the sensor the adjustment result ends in NG Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG FIN BK R 1 Finisher backup data saving All Fin Detail Fin K1 Fin AA1 To read the backup data from the Finisher Controller PCB and save in HDD Sort A1 To read the backup data from the Sorter Controller PCB and save in HDD Use Case When replacing the Finishe...

Page 969: ...g the Finisher Controller PCB When replacing the Sorter Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Output the service mode setting values by P PRINT before execution After execution enter the necessary setting values RAM clear is executed after the main power is turned OFF ON Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIV...

Page 970: ...re processing Buffer Motor M102 18 Stack Delivery Paddle Motor M103 19 Not used 20 Paper End Pushing Guide Motor M112 21 Stapler Shift Motor M114 22 Stack Tray Shift Motor M105 23 Swing Guide Motor M110 24 Front Alignment Motor M107 25 Rear Alignment Motor M108 26 Return Roller Lift Motor M111 27 Flapper Motor M104 28 Not used 29 Paper End Assist Motor M113 30 Not used 31 Escape Delivery Shift Mot...

Page 971: ...G FR ST RP 1 Ppr dst rmv at stpl free stpl Fin K1 AA1 Detail To remove the paper dust from the staple free binding unit the staple free binding operation repeatedly is executed 30 times without paper When this mode is executed the performance of the staple free binding unit recovers Use Case When the performance of the staple free binding unit deteriorates Adj Set Operate Method Select the item an...

Page 972: ...main power switch Caution Be sure to read the data before writing Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related Service Mode SORTER FUNCTION PUN BK W PUN BK W 1 Puncher backup data writing Fin AA1 Detail To write the backup data saved in HDD to Puncher Controller PCB Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB Adj Set Operate Metho...

Page 973: ...mproved but the productivity decreases Use Case When the misalignment of the buffered paper stack occurs on the processing tray Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When the buffer operation is set to OFF productivity is decreased Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 ON 1 OFF 2 Not used Default Value 0 1SHT SRT 1 Set collate dvry of 1 sheet Fin AA1 Detail To set O...

Page 974: ...set stack delivery is performed at the center reference via processing tray even in non sort mode resulting in the improvement of stacking alignment Use Case When the stacking condition at non sorting of the stack tray is poor Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When 1 is set Productivity is decreased In the case of the paper type or the paper size that can...

Page 975: ...n of job When 1 is set the tray stops at the lower limit position Visibility of the delivered papers is improved but FCOT becomes longer Use Case Upon user s request to improve visibility of the delivered papers Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When 1 is set productivity is decreased Do not put a foreign object under the tray to move the tray down to the...

Page 976: ...o 2 0 2 4 holes puncher unit 1 2 3 holes puncher unit 2 SWE 4 holes puncher unit Default Value 0 PNCH SW3 1 Set punch hole hi precision mode Fin AA1 Detail To set ON OFF of the mode to improve the precision of the punch hole position When 1 is set the punch hole position is decided by the paper trailing edge standard Use Case When the position of the punch hole is misaligned Adj Set Operate Method...

Page 977: ...OK key Caution When setting to ON productivity is decreased Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 TRY STP 1 Stpl stck limit clear Fin K1 AA1 Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stapled copies sheets When clearing the limit the tray height limit is applied instead Use Case When stacking papers beyond the maximum number of stapled copies sheets Adj Set Operate ...

Page 978: ... the center and then are offset as a paper stack Use Case In a high temperature and high humidity environment curl in the feed direction may occur with EXEC cotton bond paper When misalignment occurs with the front stapling job executed in this environment Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Shifting in a paper stack degrades productivity Display Adj Set Ra...

Page 979: ...rate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value 0 MENU 3 2 Hide dspl of printer set menu level 3 Detail To set whether to display or hide the level 3 of printer setting menu Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the ...

Page 980: ...technician is not possible The values of this item are collectively set based on the setting of 5 TYPE 5 TYPE Country setting If the item STANDARD displayed on the display is set 4 NCU data is collectively set to comply with the communication standards in Japan 6 IPFAX Communication set tings of IPFAX If the license option for IPFAX has been enabled IPFAX is displayed 7 PRINT Printer function set ...

Page 981: ...000 SW07 SW08 OK Press to accept the current input Previous Page Next Page key Press to stop the TEST When changing the setting of the bit switch directly press the bit numeric value you want to change To enter a numeric value use the numeric keypad When confirming a change in a numeric value or when executing an item press the OK key To return to the previous layer use the Reset key CAUTION When ...

Page 982: ...n condition 1 003 RTN transmission condition 2 004 RTN transmission condition 3 005 NCC pause time before ID code 006 NCC pause time after ID code 007 pre pulse time at time of call 008 not used 009 number of characters in telephone numbers between transmitting and receiving parties 010 line connection identification time 011 T 30 T1 timer for reception 012 not used 013 T 30 E0L timer 014 not used...

Page 983: ... Switch SSSW Bit Switch Composition The registration setup items of the switch are set according to the positions of its 8 bits the bit switch shown on the display is as follows each bit being either 0 or 1 SW01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 CAUTION Do not change service data identified as not used they are set as initial settings 1 7 READY Report Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX Print Clear Test 0 0 0...

Page 984: ...in the 300 series Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Select whether to increase the log storage area when firmware automatic update function of USBFAX2 a modem with Silicone Labs modem mounted version is used Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to collectively cancel the prohibition of user settings SSSW SW02 Functional Construction Bit Function 1 0 0 Not used 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used ...

Page 985: ...283 284 750 760 765 774 779 784 794 Settings using the Dial Registration user level Select international transmission 1 when making an entry in the address book If errors persist select international transmission 2 and then international transmission 3 Transmission mode selected using One Touch Dial function or the Speed Dial function will be given priority over the setting made by the service sof...

Page 986: ... the case of frequent errors caused by line condition at the time of reception Simultaneously turn OFF the ECM reception of the user data NOTE Error codes caused by line condition at the time of reception 107 114 201 Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit if errors still occur change this bit When high speed is selected only high speed signals images will be received after sending the CF...

Page 987: ... 0 Communication result at normal completion Display Do not display 1 Communication result at completion with an error Display Do not display 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 and 1 Select whether to continue displaying the communication result on the Control Panel at normal completion and or at completion with an error SSSW SW12 Functi...

Page 988: ...2 Bit1 Bit0 8 min 1 0 0 16 min 1 0 1 32 min 1 1 0 64 min 1 1 1 Timeout period at the time of reception Timeout Period Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 8 min 1 0 0 16 min 1 0 1 32 min 1 1 0 64 min 1 1 1 SSSW SW13 Functional Construction Bit Function 1 0 0 Not used 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Display Modem Dial in My Number Setting screen Yes No 4 Display Number Display Setting screen Yes No 5 No...

Page 989: ...CS or DTC signal SSSW SW17 Functional Construction Bit Function 1 0 0 Not used 1 To select the transmission level of the modem 0 to 15 8 to 15 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Select the transmission level of the modem SSSW SW18 Functional Construction Bit Function 1 0 0 Not used 1 Not used 2 Prohibition of the control of IP supported ...

Page 990: ...ailable on the Platform Version 3 6 or later Detailed Discussions of Bit3 Set whether to prohibit of manual polling operation Detailed Discussions of Bit 6 Set whether to send the sent images to the destination specified by the forwarding function SSSW SW23 Functional Construction Bit Function 1 0 0 Not used 1 Not used 2 Prohibit to rotate A4 or larger paper in portrait position by 180 degrees 3 N...

Page 991: ... Do not output Output Detailed Discussions of Bit 2 Select whether to display a confirmation message when entering destination for the sequential broadcast in order to prevent the user from broadcasting by mistake Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Select whether to use the redial function when outgoing transmission error occurs Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to output an error report whe...

Page 992: ...be no V 8 late start regardless of this setting Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Select whether to prohibit fallback from the V 34 receiver side Prohibit There will be no fallback from the receiver side SSSW SW30 Functional Construction Bit Function 1 0 0 Not used 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Switching the dial tone detection method New detection method 6 Flow control between pages C...

Page 993: ...it transmission to the extension line This is enabled only if Bit 0 function to prevent no external access code is 1 ON Enable If transmission to the extension line is allowed all telephone numbers not starting with the external access code are allowed For example if the external access code is 0 any number starting with 00 as starting 2 digits and number of the extension line are allowed This mea...

Page 994: ...y㸧 aaaaa㹼bbbbb 㸦yyyyy㸧 aaaaa㹼bbbbb 㸦yyyyy㸧 aaaaa㹼bbbbb 㸦yyyyy㸧 aaaaa㹼bbbbb 㸦yyyyy㸧 aaaaa㹼bbbbb 㸦yyyyy㸧 aaaaa㹼bbbbb No Function Scope of selection 005 NL equalizer 1 ON 0 OFF 006 Phone line monitoring 0 to 3 007 Transmission level ATT 8 to 15 ex 15 15 dBm 008 Upper limit for V 34 modulation speed 0 3429 1 3200 2 3000 3 2800 4 2743 5 2400 009 Upper limit for V 34 data speed 0 to 13 010 Frequency of ...

Page 995: ... limit of data transmission speed in the V 34 primary channel in the range between 2 4k and 33 6kbps at 2400bps intervals 0 2 4 kbps to 13 33 6 kbps 010 Pseudo CI signal frequency Set pseudo CI signal frequency Depending on the type of external phones there is no ring tone when the FAX TEL switching function is working Change the pseudo CI signal frequency when there is no ring tone Setting of Num...

Page 996: ... In the case of frequent errors caused by RTN signal transmission at the time of reception increase the parameters to loosen the RTN signal transmission condition NOTE Error codes caused by RTN signal transmission at the time of reception 104 107 114 201 RTN signal transmission condition 1 is the ratio of error lines for the total number of lines per page of the received image RTN signal transmiss...

Page 997: ...t the pattern of pseudo RBT signal to be sent at Fax Tel switching function operation 020 Pseudo CI signal pattern ON time 021 Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time short 022 Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time long Set the pattern of pseudo CI signal to be sent at Fax Tel switching function operation 023 CNG detection level when switching FAX TEL Set the CNG detection level at Fax Tel switching functio...

Page 998: ...o not set 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 To prohibit reduced size printing A4 Prohibited Not prohibited 6 To prohibit reduced size printing A4 Prohibited Not prohibited 7 Vertical scanning prioritized recording Set Do not set Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 and 1 When an image which can be printed in 100 magnification and with the same number of divided pages on any of A4 letter and legal is rec...

Page 999: ...e received A4 size document into the B5 size This function is invalid when outputting the report Setting of Numeric Parameter NUMERIC Param Numerical Parameter Composition No Function Setting range Initial setting Unit 01 Missing areas of printing image when receiving im age with longer length than standard 0 to 9999 12 1 mm 04 Leading edge blank area 0 to 9999 3 1 mm 05 Trailing edge blank area 0...

Page 1000: ...f VoIPGW buffer reset frames at ECM At ECM transmission when frames of the number of this NUM value have been transmitted the next frames will be transmitted after the VoIPGW buffer becomes empty 0 to 9999 However when the value is 0 it is internally interpreted as 16 T 38 Bit Setting SW01 Bit Function Setting range 1 0 1 German mode is effective during T 38 communication Effective Invalid 2 T 38 ...

Page 1001: ...is not cleared even when TEL service mode FAX Clear TEL or ALL service mode FAX Clear ALL is executed To clear the data execute the following service mode on the host machine COPIER Function CLEAR ADRS BK 2 When service mode FAX Clear ALL is executed a value is registered in service mode FAX TYPE according to the location of the host machine in the case of Japanese model STANDARD is registered CAU...

Page 1002: ...AKER DETECT1 DETECT2 DETECT3 VOICETX DATA SET ISDNMOD ISDNMOD2 CAUTION Do not use items in the table identified as MODEM Test Relay Test RELAY 1 Use it to see if the individual relays on the NCU board go on and off as expected 1 1 MODEM READY Report Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX Print Clear Test CML P S H D R RELAY 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OK Using Text Mode 1 From the relays indicated on the scr...

Page 1003: ...EM OK RBT 462Hz 1100Hz 1300Hz 1500Hz 1650Hz 1850Hz 2100Hz CAUTION RBT is not currently supported G3 Signal Transmission Test G3 Tx Of the items indicated below press one In response the DC circuit will be closed and the selected frequency will be transmitted using the G3 signal transmission function of the modem You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the sound generated by th...

Page 1004: ...the operation and to end test mode press the key 1 1 READY Report Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX Print Clear Test DTMFTX MODEM OK LONG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Using Text Mode 1 From the items indicated on the screen select the item you want to test then press the key on keypad that corresponds to the DTMF signal to test CAUTION SHORT is not currently supported V 34 G3 Signal Transmission Test V34G3Tx S...

Page 1005: ...ransmission Test The DC circuit will be closed and a 4800 bps signal will be transmitted using the 4800 bps signal transmission function of the modem You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the speaker To stop the operation and end test mode press the key READY 1 1 Report Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX Print Clear Test FACULTY G34800TX OK G34800TX Service Report REPORT System D...

Page 1006: ...YSTEM DATA LIST 2003 09 02 TUE 12 00 FAX 001 System Dump List NOTE A system dump list is generated when you execute the following in service mode FAX Report DUMP Use it to check the history of communications both successful and error SERIAL NO XXXXXXXX CLEAR DATE 2013 02 03 FRI 13 37 TX 1298 A4 1302 B4 49 A3 27 LTR 0 LGL 0 RX 1572 A4 1581 B4 59 A3 59 LTR 0 LGL 0 NWSPD 0 33600 1 31200 0 28800 2986 ...

Page 1007: ...001 Rx NSF CSI DIS CFR MCF MCF Tx NSS TSI DCS PIX 288 PPS NUL PIX 288 PPS NUL PIX 288 PPS NUL 2 000 START TIME 09 02 09 30 OTHER PARTY 12345678 MAKER CODE 10001000 MACHINE CODE 0100001 00000000 Rx bit 1 00000100 01110111 01011111 00100011 00000001 10101001 00000001 00000001 bit 64 bit 65 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 bit 128 Tx bit 1 00000000 01000010 0001...

Page 1008: ...BOL RATE 3429 baud DATA RATE 28800 bps V 34 TX LVL REDUCTION 0 ERR ABCODE 92 ERR SECTXB 8A ERR SECRXB 80 Rx bit 1 00000100 01110111 01011111 00100011 00000001 10101001 00000001 bit 56 bit 57 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 bit 96 Tx bit 1 00000000 01000010 00011111 00100001 00000001 00000001 00000001 bit 56 bit 57 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 bit 96 Rx NSF CSI DIS CFR ...

Page 1009: ...opy Card Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit B5 1038 Stamp Unit B1 1049 Voice Operation Kit D1 1056 IC Card Reader Box C1 1064 Voice Guidance Kit G1 1070 Serial Intreface KIT K3 Copy Control Interface KIT A1 1077 Document Scan Lock Kit B2 1083 Utility Tray B1 1087 Removable HDD Kit AK2 1091 2 5inch 1TB HDD P1 1100 Media Adjustment kit A1 1108 Connection Kit A1 for Bluetooth LE 1113 NFC Kit C...

Page 1010: ...Super G3 FAX Board AZ1 1147 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AU1 1154 Cassette Heater Unit 41 1167 9 Installation 988 ...

Page 1011: ...ibed with symbols in this procedure 1x 1x 1x Install Screw Packaged Item Remove Tighten Loosen 1x Connect Connector Disconnect Install Harness Common for Guides and Clamps Remove 1x 1x Connect Power Cord Disconnect Check visually Check the sound Check OFF Cleaning ON Push Power Unused Parts 1x 1x 9 Installation 989 ...

Page 1012: ...s machine near an outlet so that the power plug can be disconnected right away in case of emergency and do not put anything around the power plug Checking the Installation Environment 1 The environment of the installation site must be in the range as shown below Avoid installation near the faucet water boiler humidifier or refrigerator Guaranteed range for operation image Temperature 10 0 to 30 0 ...

Page 1013: ...1 kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country In addition be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it CAUTION Be sure to first complete the installation of the host machine only and then perform checking after power on Points to Note When Moving This Host Machine When moving this host machine after having unpacked it be careful by p...

Page 1014: ... of multiple host machines be sure to install the machine where the air exhausted from other machines will not directly enter the machine Also do not install the host machine near an inlet for ventilating the room Combination Table of Accessory Installation The following table shows the combination of options installed of the host machine Before installing the following options refer to the table ...

Page 1015: ... Scanner 5 Setting the Cassette 6 Installing the DADF Model without DADF 7 Installing IC Card Reader EUR Only 8 Setting the Dehumidification Switch Excluding USA and Europe 9 Turning ON the Power 10 Starting the Setup Guide NOTE For installation of the Toner Cartridge see Points to Note at Installation of the Toner Cartridge on page 1013 11 Registration of Installation Date Information 12 Adjustin...

Page 1016: ...it 2 Installing the host machine 3 Installing the DADF if it is an option Refer to Installation Procedure for the DADF 1 Unpack the host machine NOTE Installation Space When unpacking in the room the following space is required to remove the packaging box The dimensions shown in the figure below are the minimum space required Thus it is desirable to secure more space for the work than shown in the...

Page 1017: ...ach country Be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it Grip Grip 4 Remove the tapes from the exterior of the host machine CAUTION Be sure not to remove the Scanner System Fixation Screw before Installing the Scanner See Installing the Scanner on page 1005 If tapes are affixed on the Full Sensor remove them in the subsequent work Other Installations See Other Installations on page 1017 9 I...

Page 1018: ...5 Remove the cushioning material from the copyboard section Model without DADF Model with DADF 9 Installation 996 ...

Page 1019: ... 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 4x 1x 1x 230V 120V 1x 230V Australia Only 10 1 2 11 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 12 15 1x 1x USA 3 Stickers LTN 5 Stickers 1x EUR Only 17 2x 16 1x USA LTN 3 Stickers EUR 4 Stickers USA LTN Only USA LTN EUR Only 13 CA CSPL CHK Only USA Only USA LTN EUR CSPL CHK CA CIPL Only 1x 1x EUR Only 1x 13 The connector has a different shape depending on locations Use the 1 correct power cable to ...

Page 1020: ...When installing them at the same time be sure to make the Cassette Feeding Unit ready before mounting the host machine onto it If the Cassette Feeding Unit is not installed at the same time carry out the work from Installing the Scanner on page 1005 Installing the Toner Cartridge in this manual Installation Outline Drawing Host Machine Cassette Feeding Unit Unpacking 1 CAUTION Hold the left and ri...

Page 1021: ...NOTE Remove all the attached tapes and packaging materials 2 NOTE Take out the contents NOTE Perform steps 3 to 5 in each cassette 9 Installation 999 ...

Page 1022: ...ing out the cassette Otherwise it may be damaged Trail Edge Guide Plate Side Guide Plate NOTE Remove tapes attached to the cassette and remove the packaging materials 4 NOTE Remove all tapes and the Fixation Members attached to the cassette 3 and the Cassette 4 5 9 Installation 1000 ...

Page 1023: ...ing the Contents Cassette Feeding Unit 1x 3x 2x 1x Installing the Cassette Feeding Unit 1 CAUTION If mounting the host machine without opening the Right Cover Lower the cover may get damage 9 Installation 1001 ...

Page 1024: ...mounting the host machine on the Cassette Feeding Unit position the host machine parallel with the Cassette Feeding Unit and fit the 2 Positioning Pins on top of the Cassette Feeding Unit into the holes in the Base Plate of the host machine The maximum weight of the host machine is approx 81 kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country Be su...

Page 1025: ...4 NOTE The removed cover will be used in step 6 5 2x 2x 6 NOTE Use the cover removed in step 4 9 Installation 1003 ...

Page 1026: ... the coin screws with a stubby screwdriver or a coin CAUTION When tightening the coin screws pay attention to plates and parts around the screws When tightening a screw on the rear side be careful not to drop it Be sure to check that the coin screws have been tightened securely 3x 9 Installation 1004 ...

Page 1027: ...10 NOTE Install the Cassette 1 with the rails extended Installing the Scanner 1 NOTE Be sure to keep the Scanner System Fixation Screws in a safe place for moving the machine 2x 9 Installation 1005 ...

Page 1028: ...e size of paper being set Keep the Paper Size Labels as they will be used when changing the paper size Affix the Paper Size Label which is included in the package of the 2 cassette Pedestal to the 2 cassette Pedestal 5 0 mm CA CSPL CHK Only USA Only 1x 1x EUR Only 1x Installing the DADF Model without DADF Follow the installation procedure shown below to install it refer to the Installation Procedu...

Page 1029: ...1 2 2x 3 4 NOTE The removed CR BOX Upper Unit will be used in step 14 9 Installation 1007 ...

Page 1030: ...5 NOTE The removed Base Small Cover will be used in step 13 6 1x NOTE The removed screw and Base Plate Under Cover will be used in step 11 7 9 Installation 1008 ...

Page 1031: ...8 9 NOTE Secure the cables asshown in the figure CAUTION Makesure to avoid putting too much load on the connectionport of Wi Fi cable 5x 1x 9 Installation 1009 ...

Page 1032: ...10 11 NOTE Use the screw and Base Plate Under Coverremoved in step 6 1x 12 NOTE Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the thickness of the Card Reader 9 Installation 1010 ...

Page 1033: ...13 NOTE Usethe Base Small Cover removed in step 5 14 NOTE Use the CR BOX Upper Unit removed in step 4 15 9 Installation 1011 ...

Page 1034: ...ning ON the Power 1 Connect the power plug to the outlet 2 Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel 3 Turn ON the main power switch CAUTION Points to Note at Installation of the Toner Cartridge Be sure not to touch the Toner Cartridge until the instruction screen appears on the Touch Panel Display Do not perform installation of the Toner Cartridge until instructed 9 Installation 1012 ...

Page 1035: ...ace the Toner Cartridge is displayed on the Touch Panel Display After checking the Replace the Toner Cartridge display close the screen Be sure to follow the procedure to install the Toner Cartridge Installing the Toner Cartridge For China and Korea 1 NOTE Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each color 2 3 4 Hold the Toner Cartridge black as shown in the figure and shake it approx 10 times CAUTION Be sure to ...

Page 1036: ...horizontally with your hand supporting its bottom until approx half of it is inserted 6 7 Installing the Toner Cartridge Countries other than China and Korea 1 2 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each color 3 Unpack the Toner Cartridge 4 9 Installation 1014 ...

Page 1037: ...the instructions displayed on the Touch Panel Display to configure the settings of the host machine CAUTION Some of the settings can be skipped without entering the command To configure skipped settings configure the settings one by one after exiting Setup Guide Setup Guide can be started again from Settings Registration Settings Registration Management Settings License Other Start Setup Guide If ...

Page 1038: ... for which you want to specify the paper type and press Set 2 Select the paper type and press OK 3 If Plain is selected the basis weight can be specify from Plain Paper Weight Set 4 If a button corresponding to the paper that has been set is not displayed press Detailed Settings and make a selection on the detailed settings screen NOTE If the corresponding paper type is not displayed on the simple...

Page 1039: ...on Date on the counter report will be blank 2 Exit service mode 3 Output the counter report and check that the installation date information is registered Counter Device Information key Print List Yes Adjusting the DADF Model without DADF Follow the installation procedure shown below to adjust it refer to the Installation Procedure included in the package of the option Single Pass DADF B1 DADF AV1...

Page 1040: ...alling the following options Be sure to follow the instruction given in each procedure for the position to install the Tray Guide If the Tray Guide is not installed as instructed malfunction or failure may occur Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher 5 CAUTION Do not install the Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box to the front side as the Motion Sensor is installed Install to the left side o...

Page 1041: ... where to install it 1 In the case of not connecting an option to the left side of the host machine In the case of connecting an option to the left side of the host machine 2 3 NOTE Do not cover the screw holes Do not cover the area for affixing the Face Seal In the case of not connecting an option to the left side of the host machine In the case of connecting an option to the left side of the hos...

Page 1042: ...l Sensor remove the tape while paying attention not to damage the sensor 7 NOTE Do not install it if one of the following options is installed at the same time Inner 2way Tray Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher 9 Installation 1020 ...

Page 1043: ...3 adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal with a screwdriver Be sure to secure it in place to prevent overturning Securing with the adjusters is not an earthquake countermeasure Installing the Envelope Attachment Installing the Envelope Attachment A CAUTION The Envelope Attachment is used exclusively with the Cassette 2 NOTE Install remove the Envelope Attachment only if requested by the customer Envel...

Page 1044: ...ette 2 4 Close the Cassette 2 Settings after Installation 1 Select Settings Registration Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings Cassette 2 Envelope 2 Select the type of envelope to be used and then press OK to register it Display Operation Check 1 Check that Envelope is selected for Cassette 2 on the Control Panel s Paper Settings screen 2 Check that the envelope is picked up 9 Installation 102...

Page 1045: ... Host Address Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check whether connection to the network is enabled or not Remote host address IP address of PC terminal connected running on TCP IP network environment that connects to this equipment 1 Inform the system administrator about checking of the network connection using Ping 2 Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator 3 ...

Page 1046: ... Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING command enter the IP address 127 0 0 1 with the numeric keypad and then press Start key 2 When Response from the host is displayed network function of the Main Controller operates normally When No response from the host is displayed the network function of the Main Controller is failed Replace the Main Controller with a properly operating one...

Page 1047: ...ing the grips of the machine when lifting will result in separation of the machine from the Cassette Pedestal 1 From the following service mode Level 2 move the Scanner Unit to the position to secure COPIER FUNCTION MISC R RD SHPOS 2 Turn OFF the main power 3 Disconnect the power plug of the host machine 4 If the Cassette Pedestal is installed turn the 3 adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal with a s...

Page 1048: ...anner System Fixation Screws in a safe place for moving the machine If the Cassette Pedestal is installed turn the 3 adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal to fix it in place If the Cassette Pedestal is installed securely tighten the coin screws of the host machine and the 2 cassette Pedestal CAUTION Be careful not to damage nearby plates and parts when tightening the coin screws When tightening a scr...

Page 1049: ... OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power a...

Page 1050: ...Installation Procedure Installing the Equipment 1 2 3 9 Installation 1028 ...

Page 1051: ...mm or less as a guide between the White Plate and the Index Sheet Check that the White Plate is not placed over the Index Sheet Platen Cover Platen Cover Platen Cover Platen Cover Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit 7 Connect the power plug to the outlet 9 Installation 1029 ...

Page 1052: ...8 Turn ON the main power switch 9 Installation 1030 ...

Page 1053: ...ng OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power appears turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 2 If a message ...

Page 1054: ...Installation procedure 1 NOTE If the Reverse Guide is installed to the host machine remove it CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Full Detection Flag when installing it 2 TP M3x6 1x 9 Installation 1032 ...

Page 1055: ...3 4 CAUTION Be sure that the Inner 2 way Tray Support Member is installed properly 9 Installation 1033 ...

Page 1056: ...ns of the user administrator Password at the time of shipment System Manager ID Administrator System PIN 7654321 1 Set the value of the following service mode to 1 COPIER OPTION ACC IN TRAY 2 Turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Check that the following menu has been added Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Tray Designation 4 Press Tray Designation 5 According to...

Page 1057: ...rning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power appears turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 2 If a messa...

Page 1058: ...NOTE The work is the same when the Utility Tray is installed 2 CAUTION Because the Copy Tray comes in contact with the rib if installed while laid flat be sure to install it while keeping it upright Rib Rib 9 Installation 1036 ...

Page 1059: ...r administrator Password at the time of shipment System Manager ID Administrator System PIN 7654321 1 Set the value of the following service mode to 1 COPIER OPTION ACC OUT TRAY 2 Turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Check that the following menu has been added Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Tray Designation 4 Press Tray Designation 5 According to the user s ...

Page 1060: ...G If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine it may cause electrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned o...

Page 1061: ...x12 TP M4x12 1x 1x 1x 2x 2x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 2x 4x 1x 1x Binding M4x6 W Sams M3x14 Installation Procedure CAUTION After installing the Copy Card Reader enter the card number to be used in the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD Otherwise the card will not be recognized even if inserting it 9 Installation 1039 ...

Page 1062: ...ng the Covers 1 2x 2 1x Installing the Copy Card Reader 1 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 2x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 5 9 Installation 1040 ...

Page 1063: ...2 2x 1x 3 1x 1x 1x 4 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 5 9 Installation 1041 ...

Page 1064: ... let the Relay Cable come in contact with the metal part on the Controller Box It may cause malfunctioning if the cable touch the metal part of the Box NOTE Use the screws removed in step 1 and step 4 2x 1x 1x 9 Installation 1042 ...

Page 1065: ...6 CAUTION Be careful not to trap the cable when mounting the cover 1x 7 2x 9 Installation 1043 ...

Page 1066: ...OTE Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit and change the position of the cable 1x 1x Lower Cover 9 1x 10 1x 1x 11 CAUTION Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle 1x 1x 9 Installation 1044 ...

Page 1067: ...12 1x 13 2x TP M3x12 14 CAUTION Prevention of a fall Be sure to hold the Card Reader Mounting Plate Front Unit with your hand until securing it with screws 4x TP M3x6 9 Installation 1045 ...

Page 1068: ...Reader External Relay Cable at the A part and insert it through the 2 Cord Guides 3 Install the 2 covers of the Cord Guides A Reader Cable Cover Exhaust Outlet 2x 17 Connect the power plug to the outlet 18 Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine Routing the Cable when installing this equipment and other options simultaneously Routing the cable when installing the Copy Card Reader and oth...

Page 1069: ... Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure Use the Cord Guides included with the Copy Card Reader 2 Fold the cable of the Copy Card Reader at the A part and insert the cable of the Copy Card Reader through the 2 Cord Guides 3 Install the 2 Cord Guide Covers 2 Securing the Cable of the Voice Guidance 1 Remove the covers of the 4 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to...

Page 1070: ...to change the number of cards the number of departments after it has been set In that case counter information for each department is reset Perform the following Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR CARD Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the settings After that perform the setup procedure again from step 1 9 Installation 1048 ...

Page 1071: ... is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power appears turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 2 If a message prompting the user to update the version appears press Update to automatically update the version of this equipment If Skip is selected a message prompting the user to update the version will appear every time the host machine is started In the service m...

Page 1072: ...sure to place paper in order to prevent the Copyboard Glass from being damaged when the cover of the document reading area is opened 2 3 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 6 The removed parts will be used in step 7 4 1x 9 Installation 1050 ...

Page 1073: ... to store the harness in the guide so as not to trap the harness in the next step 1x 2x 7 NOTE Use the parts removed in step 3 Be sure to use the screw included in the package CAUTION Be careful not to trap the cables 1x P Tightening M3x12 8 9 Installation 1051 ...

Page 1074: ...in the Stamp Ink Cartridge until it clicks 10 11 12 13 Connect the power plug to the outlet 14 Turn ON the main power switch CAUTION After completion of this procedure proceed to Operation Check on page 1055 9 Installation 1052 ...

Page 1075: ... In the case of the Reversal DADF 1 2 3 NOTE The removed part will be used in step 8 9 Installation 1053 ...

Page 1076: ... NOTE The removed parts will be used in step 7 5 CAUTION Be sure to push in the Stamp Ink Cartridge until it clicks 6 1x 1x P Tightening M3x12 7 NOTE Use the parts removed in step 4 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the A part of the Feed Guide with a screwdriver when tightening the screw 1x A 9 Installation 1054 ...

Page 1077: ...this procedure proceed to Operation Check on page 1055 Operation Check 1 Set the original on the Feeder 2 Press Scan and Send on the Touch Panel Display 3 Specify the destination and select Options Finished Stamp then press Close 4 Press the Start key and check that a stamp is printed on the original scanned by the Feeder 9 Installation 1055 ...

Page 1078: ...ectrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 Whe...

Page 1079: ...M3x6 2x 1x Binding M4x14 Use the Ring Core for the External Switch Cable which belongs to the user Others Including guides Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x 3 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1057 ...

Page 1080: ...4 2x 5 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 6 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1058 ...

Page 1081: ...7 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly NOTE Use the screws removed in steps 3 5 and 6 1x 1x 2x 8 2x 9 1x 9 Installation 1059 ...

Page 1082: ...10 2x 11 12 2x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 14 13 Binding M3x14 2x Binding M4x14 Binding M3x14 Binding M4x14 9 Installation 1060 ...

Page 1083: ...14 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 12 Install the Speaker Unit Upper while pressing it from the direction of the arrow 2x 15 16 1x 2x 1x 2x 9 Installation 1061 ...

Page 1084: ...x the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 2 Insert the DVI Cable through the Cord Guides and install the 7 covers of the Cord Guides 7x Reader Cable Cover Exhaust Outlet 18 NOTE Be sure to install the Ring Core as close to where the cable is connected as possible NOTE Putting the user s External Switch Cable around the Ring Core 19 1x 9 Installation 1062 ...

Page 1085: ...with instructions from the user administrator 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Use Voice Navigation and check that the setting is ON 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Voice Navigation at Startup and check that ...

Page 1086: ... plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and the...

Page 1087: ...Checking the Contents 1x 2x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 11x 1x without LED indication 1x with LED indication 1x with LED indication Installation Procedure 1 2 2x 3 2x 9 Installation 1065 ...

Page 1088: ...4 6x 5 4x 6 7 NOTE Do not close the Wire Saddle 1x 8 9 Installation 1066 ...

Page 1089: ...e the cables as shown in the figure CAUTION When the Expansion Kit A1 for Bluetooth LE is connected make sure to avoid putting too much load on the connection port of Wi Fi cable 5x 1x 10 11 1x 9 Installation 1067 ...

Page 1090: ...12 NOTE Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the thickness of the Card Reader 13 9 Installation 1068 ...

Page 1091: ...14 15 16 17 2x 18 9 Installation 1069 ...

Page 1092: ...ectrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 Whe...

Page 1093: ...x20 2x 2x 1x 1x Binding M4x16 1x Binding M3x16 3x 4x 1x Binding M4x16 Others Including guides Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x 3 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1071 ...

Page 1094: ...4 2x 5 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 6 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1072 ...

Page 1095: ...7 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly NOTE Use the screws removed in step 3 step 5 and step 6 1x 2x 1x 8 2x 9 1x 9 Installation 1073 ...

Page 1096: ...10 2x 11 12 Binding M3x16 2x Binding M4x16 Binding M3x16 Binding M4x16 13 NOTE Install the Speaker Unit Upper while pressing it from the direction of the arrow 1x Binding M4x6 9 Installation 1074 ...

Page 1097: ...through the 4 Cord Guides and install the 4 Cord Guide Covers 4x A Reader Cable Cover Exhaust Outlet Routing the Cable when installing this equipment and other options simultaneously For Copy Card Reader and Voice Guidance 1 Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader 1 Remove the covers of the 2 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure Use the Cord Guides includ...

Page 1098: ...to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Use Voice Navigation and check that the setting is ON 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings...

Page 1099: ... the power plug of the host machine it may cause electrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the ...

Page 1100: ...king the Contents Serial Intreface KIT K3 1x 1x 1x 1x 3x 1x 2x 2x TP M3 x 6 1x 1x Copy Control Interface KIT A1 2x 2x 2x 1x 1x 2x 1x Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 9 Installation 1078 ...

Page 1101: ...stalling the Serial Interface Kit 1 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 2x 2 1x 3 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in a later step 9 Installation 1079 ...

Page 1102: ...he Serial RS Conversion Board 1x 2x 1x Copy Control Interface KIT A1 1 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 2x 2 CAUTION Install the extruded side of the D SUB Support Plate as shown in the figure Inside D SUB Support Plate CC VI Cable 9 Installation 1080 ...

Page 1103: ...3 CAUTION Install the CC VI Cable in the direction shown in the figure 2x 1x Installing the Covers 1 1x 9 Installation 1081 ...

Page 1104: ...2 2x 3 Connect the power plug to the outlet 4 Turn ON the power switch 9 Installation 1082 ...

Page 1105: ... electrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 ...

Page 1106: ...Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x 3 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the screws 2x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 7 4 2x 9 Installation 1084 ...

Page 1107: ...5 2x 6 NOTE Peel off the release paper align the edge of the label to A and B then affix the label A B 7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 3 2x 8 2x 1x TP M3x6 9 Installation 1085 ...

Page 1108: ...outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Ask users to install license 4 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 5 Press Counter Device Information Device Info Other Check Device Configuration key on the control panel 6 Check that Image Data Analyzer Board is displayed in option field 9 Installation 1086 ...

Page 1109: ...Serial Inter face Kit Copy Control Inter face Kit Utility Tray No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Available No Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes Installation Outline Drawing Checking the Contents 1x 1x 4x 2x 5x 7x TP M4x8 Black TP M4x14 TP M4x10 3x TP M4x8 Black The parts using to inst...

Page 1110: ... too much 3 4 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation Be sure to install it by using the holes with the marks D G J M and P A Q R S B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P D P M J G TP M4x8 Black 5x A Q R S B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P D P M J G 9 Installation 1088 ...

Page 1111: ...5 CAUTION To avoid damage do not pull the Utility Tray too much 6 2x 2x TP M4x8 Black 9 Installation 1089 ...

Page 1112: ...When Installing the USB Keyboard 1 9 Installation 1090 ...

Page 1113: ...OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power ap...

Page 1114: ...Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 3 2x 9 Installation 1092 ...

Page 1115: ... Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 2 3x 4x 9 Installation 1093 ...

Page 1116: ...x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 13 4 CAUTION Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to drop it when removing the screw 1x 4x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 8 5 1x 9 Installation 1094 ...

Page 1117: ...6 7 8 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the HDD Place the HDD with the label side facing up and the connector oriented as shown in the figure NOTE Use the screws removed in step 4 4x 9 Installation 1095 ...

Page 1118: ...re to write down the serial number on the RHDD Label 2 in order to show from which machine it was removed and prevent it from being installed to another machine Be sure to affix the R HDD Label 2 on a flat surface XXXXXXXX Rib Serial No 10 CAUTION Set the HDD Toggle Lever in the correct position as shown in the figure and check that the HDD Case can be inserted all the way and installed properly U...

Page 1119: ...11 12 1x 13 NOTE Use the screw removed in step 3 1x 9 Installation 1097 ...

Page 1120: ...14 3x 4x Installing the Covers 1 2 2x 3 1x 9 Installation 1098 ...

Page 1121: ... removable HDD to discourage theft Checking after Installation 1 Connect the power plug to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 From the following service mode check that the HDD is recognized Additionally check that the manufacture name and model number of HDD are displayed COPIER DISPLAY ACC STS HDD 9 Installation 1099 ...

Page 1122: ...ug of the host machine it may cause electrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power Th...

Page 1123: ...Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 3 2x 9 Installation 1101 ...

Page 1124: ... Installing the 2 5inch 1TB HDD 1 3x 4x 2 1x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 7 9 Installation 1102 ...

Page 1125: ...o as not to drop it when removing the screw 1x 4x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 6 4 1x NOTE The removed Cable Unit will be used in a later step 5 NOTE Use the Cable Unit removed in the previous step 1x 9 Installation 1103 ...

Page 1126: ...D so as not to drop it when removing the screw Be sure that the label on the HDD is in the direction shown in the figure below NOTE Use the screws removed in step 3 4x 1x 7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 2 1x 9 Installation 1104 ...

Page 1127: ...8 3x 4x Installing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x 9 Installation 1105 ...

Page 1128: ...mat HDD 5 Select All and click Start 6 Click Execute Format 7 The Format is executed 8 Click OK 9 After formatting is completed select Shutdown Restart and click Restart 10 Click OK 11 The power of the host machine is turned OFF 12 Terminate the SST 13 Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the machine and connect the user s network cable to the machine In case of USB flash drive NOTE Use the US...

Page 1129: ...Execution of the minimum installation work Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized when this kit is installed 9 Installation 1107 ...

Page 1130: ...achine it may cause electrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following mess...

Page 1131: ...AUTION Moving the Lever Assembly to the following position changes the open close status of the host machine s Right Door A Position that opens the host machine s Right Door B Position that fully opens the host machine s Right Door A B A B 3 Remove the guide 2 Screws 2 Bosses 2x 4 Remove the 3 springs from the guide removed in step 3 and install the 3 springs included in the package 㯮 9 Installati...

Page 1132: ...e Right Door 7 Open the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Tray Assembly 8 Open the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate and install the Media Adjustment kit 1 Protrusion Settings after installation 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 9 Installation 1110 ...

Page 1133: ...is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator The default password is indicated below System Manager ID Administrator System PIN 7654321 CAUTION Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment for plain paper first If auto gradation adjustment is not executed with plain paper and then heavy paper 1200 dpi in that order it may cause difference in h...

Page 1134: ...2 On the screen shown below press Change and then Detailed Settings 3 9 Installation 1112 ...

Page 1135: ...the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power appears turn OFF and then ON the main power ...

Page 1136: ...nstallation Procedure 1 2 2x 3 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in a later step 4 NOTE Use the screw removed in the previous step 1x 1x When there is extra slack of the cable 9 Installation 1114 ...

Page 1137: ... adjustment NOTE If there is extra slack of the cable adjust the cable so that the slack is distributed evenly on the Cable Guide B Allow extra slack of the cable at the C part B C 5 2x 6 7 A A B B A A B B 9 Installation 1115 ...

Page 1138: ...E NOTE When System Manager Information Settings is set it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Network Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes and set the item ON 5 Select Settings Registration Preferences Network Bluetooth Settings Use Bluetooth ON 6 The message Perform Apply Setting Chang...

Page 1139: ...se damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power appears turn OFF and then ON th...

Page 1140: ...Installation procedure Remove the Control Panel 1 2 2x 3 4 2x 5 2x 9 Installation 1118 ...

Page 1141: ...6 2x 7 4x 8 3x 9 10 9 Installation 1119 ...

Page 1142: ...11 12 6x 13 2x 14 9 Installation 1120 ...

Page 1143: ... Installing the NFC Kit 1 2 2x 3 1x TP M3x4 4 1x 9 Installation 1121 ...

Page 1144: ... Installing the Control Panel 1 2 2x 3 6x 4 9 Installation 1122 ...

Page 1145: ...5 6 3x 7 4x 8 2x 9 10 2x 9 Installation 1123 ...

Page 1146: ...11 2x 12 13 2x 14 9 Installation 1124 ...

Page 1147: ...s Registration Management Settings Device Management Use NFC Card Emulation and set the item to ON 5 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 6 When a message prompting the version update is displayed press Update and automatically update the version of this equipment CAUTION It may take time to display the update screen Approx 1 to 2 min During this time do not operate the screen 7 Check the en...

Page 1148: ... power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power appears turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 2 If a message prompting the u...

Page 1149: ...m the actual things the procedure is the same NOTE Proceed to the appropriate procedure from this point on In the case of 1 path ADF Installing the Reader Heater on page 1127 In the case of Reverse ADF Installing the Reader Heater on page 1136 In the case of 1 path ADF Installing the Reader Heater 1 2x NOTE The removed parts will be used in step 5 9 Installation 1127 ...

Page 1150: ... or installing the Copyboard Glass be sure not to touch the glass surface and the White Plate If soiling is attached clean it with lint free paper White Plate 3 CAUTION NOTE Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the figure Open the Edge Saddle if closed 9 Installation 1128 ...

Page 1151: ...and the White Plate affects reading When removing or installing the Copyboard Glass be sure not to touch the glass surface and the White Plate If soiling is attached clean it with lint free paper White Plate NOTE Use the parts removed in step 1 2x 9 Installation 1129 ...

Page 1152: ...6 7 2x 8 1x 9 3x NOTE The removed parts will be used in step 10 In the case of 1 path ADF of Installing the Relay PCB 9 Installation 1130 ...

Page 1153: ...10 3x 3x 11 2x NOTE The removed parts will be used in step 8 In the case of 1 path ADF of Installing the Relay PCB 12 2x 1x 13 9 Installation 1131 ...

Page 1154: ...14 4x Installing the Relay PCB 1 1x 1x TP M3x6 1x 2 1x 1x 9 Installation 1132 ...

Page 1155: ...3 4 2x 3x 5 4x 6 9 Installation 1133 ...

Page 1156: ...7 2x 1x 8 NOTE Use the parts removed in step 11 In the case of 1 path ADF of Installing the Reader Heater 2x 9 3x 3x 9 Installation 1134 ...

Page 1157: ...10 NOTE Check the position shown below when installing the cover NOTE Use the parts removed in step 9 In the case of 1 path ADF of Installing the Reader Heater 3x 11 1x 12 2x 9 Installation 1135 ...

Page 1158: ...f this procedure proceed to Installing the Dehumidification Switch and Checking the Switch on page 1143 In the case of Reverse ADF Installing the Reader Heater 1 2x NOTE The removed parts will be used in step 5 9 Installation 1136 ...

Page 1159: ... or installing the Copyboard Glass be sure not to touch the glass surface and the White Plate If soiling is attached clean it with lint free paper White Plate 3 CAUTION NOTE Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the figure Open the Edge Saddle if closed 9 Installation 1137 ...

Page 1160: ...d the White Plate affects reading When removing or installing the Copyboard Glass be sure not to touch the glass surface and the White Plate If soiling is attached clean it with lint free paper White Plate NOTE Use the parts removed in step 1 2x 6 2x 9 Installation 1138 ...

Page 1161: ...ver if closed 8 3x NOTE The removed parts will be used in step 8 In the case of Reverse ADF of Installing the Relay PCB 9 2x 1x 2x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 6 In the case of Reverse ADF of Installing the Relay PCB 10 4x 9 Installation 1139 ...

Page 1162: ... Installing the Relay PCB 1 1x 1x TP M3x6 1x 2 1x 1x 9 Installation 1140 ...

Page 1163: ...3 4 2x 3x 5 4x 9 Installation 1141 ...

Page 1164: ...6 CAUTION Fix the Grounding Cable in the correct direction NOTE Use the parts removed in step 9 In the case of Reverse ADF of Installing the Reader Heater 2x 1x 2x 7 2x 9 Installation 1142 ...

Page 1165: ...ews removed in step 8 In the case of Reverse ADF of Removing the Covers 3x 9 CAUTION After completion of this procedure proceed to Installing the Dehumidification Switch and Checking the Switch on page 1143 Installing the Dehumidification Switch and Checking the Switch NOTE If the Dehumidification Switch is installed start from step 8 9 Installation 1143 ...

Page 1166: ...1 CAUTION Do not insert the screwdriver into the hole when removing the cover 2 3 2x 9 Installation 1144 ...

Page 1167: ...4 1x 5 CAUTION Be sure to install the Dehumidification switch in the correction direction 1x 9 Installation 1145 ...

Page 1168: ...TE Before installing the Rear Lower Cover fit it to the 3 hooks of the Rear Upper Cover 2x 7 8 9 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 10 Turn ON the main power switch 9 Installation 1146 ...

Page 1169: ...lug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ...

Page 1170: ... 1 2x 2 1x Installing the Fax Unit NOTE When installing the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board at the same time do not perform the following procedure but start from Installing the 2nd Line Fax Board of Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board Installation Procedure 1 9 Installation 1148 ...

Page 1171: ...N When installing the FAX Unit be careful not to trap the Cables of the FAX Unit Do not directly touch the speaker A of the FAX Unit Be sure not to damage the speaker A A 2x M3x6 3 NOTE Open the Edge Saddle if closed 1x 3x 4 NOTE Open the Wire Saddles if closed 3x 9 Installation 1149 ...

Page 1172: ... Installing the Covers 1 1x 2 NOTE Store the removed Face Cover in the Tray Guide in step 5 3 2x 4 9 Installation 1150 ...

Page 1173: ...ffer depending on the number of Face Covers Less than 4 Face Covers or 4 Face Covers Be sure to store the removed Face Covers as shown below ղ ձ ճ մ ղ ձ ճ In the case of four In the case of less than four 6 Procedure after Work 1 2 For USA and Taiwan FAX Approval Labele 9 Installation 1151 ...

Page 1174: ...TT Cable or Telephone Cord to the modular jack on the Host machine and connect the other end to the modular jack on the wall 1x CAUTION When using the EXT modular terminal use a flatblade screwdriver etc to remove the Modular Spacer located in the modular terminal area Keep the removed Modular Spacer Do not insert a screwdriver etc into the modular terminal 5 Connect the Power Plug to the outlet 9...

Page 1175: ...F ON the main power switch to enable this setting Basic Setting NOTE When System Manager Information Settings is set be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator In this section make only minimum settings required for FAX communication 1 Set the user telephone number Settings Registration Function Settings Send Fax Settings Set Line Line 1 Register U...

Page 1176: ...it may cause electrical shock If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power it may cause damage of the machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is ...

Page 1177: ...or Europe 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x Preparation Remove the Covers NOTE When a Telephone Cord is connected disconnect it 1 2x 2 1x Removing the Fax Unit When the Fax Unit is installed NOTE When the Fax Unit is not installed proceed to Installing the Equipment Installing the 2nd Line Fax Board on page 1157 9 Installation 1155 ...

Page 1178: ... 3x 2 1x 3x 3 CAUTION Do not directly touch the speaker A of the FAX Unit Be sure not to damage the speaker A A 2x NOTE The removed 2 screws will be used in step 2 of Subsequent Work 9 Installation 1156 ...

Page 1179: ...Installing the 2nd Line Fax Board 1 NOTE Remove the packing tape if any 2x NOTE The removed FAX Frame and 2 Screws will be used in step 11 2 1x 3 2x M3x6 4 5 3x 9 Installation 1157 ...

Page 1180: ...6 1x 7 8 5x M3x6 9 Installation 1158 ...

Page 1181: ...dle 3x A A 1x 10 1x 11 CAUTION Installing the Plate Be sure to install the FAX Frame in an orientation appropriate for the country or region where the machine is installed EU Excluding EU NOTE Use the screws and the FAX Frame removed in step 1 2x 9 Installation 1159 ...

Page 1182: ...e careful not to trap the 2 Cables of the FAX Unit Do not directly touch the speaker A of the FAX Unit Be sure not to damage the speaker A A NOTE Use the screws removed in step 3 of Preparation Removing the Fax Unit When the Fax Unit is installed When installing the Super G3 Fax Board at the same time be sure to use the screws included with the Super G3 Fax Board 2x 9 Installation 1160 ...

Page 1183: ...ed 1x 4x 4 NOTE Open the Wire Saddle if closed 3x 5 1x 6 NOTE When installing the Super G3 FAX Board 1 Line at the same time remove the Face Cover of the 1 Line Store the removed Face Cover in the Tray Guide in step 9 9 Installation 1161 ...

Page 1184: ...Tray Guide The storage locations differ depending on the number of Face Covers Less than 4 Face Covers or 4 Face Covers Be sure to store the removed Face Covers as shown below ղ ձ ճ մ ղ ձ ճ In the case of four In the case of less than four 10 9 Installation 1162 ...

Page 1185: ...Label included in the package of the Super G3 FAX Board 12 NOTE The following work is required only when installing the Super G3 FAX Board at the same time Affix the following FAX Approval Label For USA and Taiwan NOTE This step is only for Taiwan Affix the following FAX Approval Label 9 Installation 1163 ...

Page 1186: ... PTT Plug 1x 14 CAUTION When using the EXT modular terminal use a flatblade screwdriver etc to remove the Modular Spacer located in the modular terminal area Keep the removed Modular Spacer Do not insert a screwdriver etc into the modular terminal NOTE Connect the end of the PTT Cable or Telephone Cord to the Modular Jack LINE 1 and LINE 2 on the host machine and connect the other end to the Modul...

Page 1187: ...ION DSPLY SW SDTM DSP NOTE Change the parameter to 0 to hide Settings Registration Preferences Timer Energy Settings Auto Shutdown Time and disable the auto shut down 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch to enable this setting Basic Settings NOTE When System Manager Information Settings is set be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator In this secti...

Page 1188: ... ACTIVITY REPORT TX RX shows line type used for sending receiving E g ECM 2 Line 2 NOTE If E744 5000 error code Fax software version mismatch error occurred while sending or receiving fax upgrade the firmware of 2 line Fax to the latest version 9 Installation 1166 ...

Page 1189: ...he machine When turning OFF the main power follow the below procedure 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off Points to Note when turning ON OFF the main power The following message is displayed 1 When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the main power appears turn OFF and then ON the main power s...

Page 1190: ...cs Installation Procedure Removing the Cassette In the Case of Host Machine Cassette Feeding Unit NOTE In the case of host machine remove the Cassette 1 and 2 In the case of the Cassette Feeding Unit remove the Cassette 3 and 4 1 In the Case of High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit 1 3x NOTE The removed parts will be used in Installing the Cassette 9 Installation 1168 ...

Page 1191: ...2 2x NOTE The removed parts will be used in Installing the Cassette 3 4 1x NOTE The removed parts will be used in Installing the Cassette 9 Installation 1169 ...

Page 1192: ...5 CAUTION Be sure to release the lock and then disconnect the FCC Connector 1x 6 7 9 Installation 1170 ...

Page 1193: ... Installing the Cassette Heater 1 2 3 In the case of Host machine TP Round End M3x6 1x 9 Installation 1171 ...

Page 1194: ...n the case of Cassette Feeding Unit or High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit TP Round End M3x6 2x 4 1x 5 NOTE The Heater Connector Cover comes in different shapes Without ribs With ribs 9 Installation 1172 ...

Page 1195: ...ables Be sure to run the cables as shown in the figure below before installing the Connector Cover Installing the Cassette In the Case of Host Machine Cassette Feeding Unit NOTE In the case of the Cassette 1 pull out the rail and slide it into the host machine 1 9 Installation 1173 ...

Page 1196: ... In the Case of High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit 1 2 NOTE Slide the inner rails of the rails you pulled out toward the front side to ease insertion of the cassette 9 Installation 1174 ...

Page 1197: ...3 CAUTION Align the rails and push in the cassette to the first lock position Do not push in the cassette all the way because the Flat Cable is not connected 4 9 Installation 1175 ...

Page 1198: ...the Cassette 1x 1x 6 7 NOTE Use the parts removed in Removing the Cassette Hook the B part of the plate on the left side on the A part of the plate Push in the cassette and align the boss when hanging the hook C A 3x A B C 9 Installation 1176 ...

Page 1199: ...e B part of the plate on the right side on the A part of the plate A 2x A B 9 Installing the Dehumidification Switch and Checking the Switch 1 CAUTION Do not insert the screwdriver into the hole when removing the Dehumidification Switch Cover 9 Installation 1177 ...

Page 1200: ...2 3 2x 4 1x 9 Installation 1178 ...

Page 1201: ...5 CAUTION Be sure to install the switch in the correction direction 1x 6 2x 9 Installation 1179 ...

Page 1202: ...7 8 9 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 10 Turn ON the main power switch 9 Installation 1180 ...

Page 1203: ...APPENDICES Service Tools 1182 General Circuit Diagram 1183 Software Counter Specifications 1201 Removal 1207 Target PCBs of Automatic Update 1210 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored 1211 ...

Page 1204: ... Configuration Use Remarks Digital multi meter FY9 2002 A Used for supplementary electricity check of the electricity check CA 1 Test Sheet FY9 9030 A For image adjustment check Reference Rank A Tool each service engineers should have 1 pc per engineer B Tool a group of approx 5 engineers should have 1 pc per group Solvents and Oils None Service Tools 1182 ...

Page 1205: ... 4 5 6 1 J1114D 3 4 5 6 1 2 J1114L 2 3 1 J1004M 2 3 1 J2108M 2 3 1 J1108F 2 3 1 J1108M 2 3 4 5 6 1 J1181D 3 4 5 6 1 2 J1181L 1 2 3 J814 J1601DH 1 2 3 J1601D END4 END3 2 3 4 1 J1003L 2 3 4 1 J1003D 2 3 1 J801 3 4 5 6 1 2 J811 2 1 J816 2 3 4 1 J812 1 2 3 4 5 6 J813 1 2 3 J506 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J504 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 J503 2 3 1 J1801 2 1 J1501 2 1 J301 2 3 4 5 1 J302 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J505 SOLD30 ...

Page 1206: ... 4 5 6 7 J1096LH J1096D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J721L J721D J721DH J1149L J1149DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J1147DH 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1147L J1195 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1001LB 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1001LA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1019 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M J1149D J1147D 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1001DB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1001DA J1155L J1155D J1155DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 J1423 1 2 3 J1425 1 2 3 J1424 16 ...

Page 1207: ...4 J1174L 1 2 3 4 M 1 2 3 4 J1167L 1 2 3 4 J1337L 1 2 3 4 M J1104L 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1029 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1105L 1 2 3 J1342LH 1 2 3 J1342L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1148L 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1097D 1 2 3 4 J1169D J1174LH 1 2 3 4 J1174D 1 2 3 4 J1167D 1 2 3 4 J1337D J1104LH 1 2 J1032L 1 2 J1032D J1032DH J1104D J1105LH 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1105D 1 2 3 J1342D J...

Page 1208: ...57L J1057D 1 2 3 3 2 1 SOLD17 J1060 1 2 3 J1062 3 2 1 J1255LH J1255L J1255D 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J1051 J1257DH 1 2 3 4 J1257L 1 2 3 4 J1257D J1053 1 2 3 4 1 2 J1058L 1 2 J1058D 1 2 3 J1059 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 J1061 3 2 1 3 2 1 J1011 1 2 3 4 J1041L J1041LH 1 2 3 4 J1041D J1043D J1043LH 1 2 3 4 J1043L 2 1 1 2 3 4 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1177L J1177LH J1058DH J1256DH 1 2 3 4 J1256L 1 2 3 4 J1256D J1258L ...

Page 1209: ... 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M SOLD27 SOLD26 3 2 1 1 2 J1202D J1202DH 1 2 3 4 M 1 2 J1202 J1204DH 1 2 J1204L 1 2 J1204D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1054 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1103 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1190 9 8 7 6 5 2 1 3 4 M SOLD24 SOLD25 1 2 3 J1335D 1 2 3 4 J1201D 1 2 3 4 J1201L SOLD23 SOLD22 J1024DH 1 2 3 J1024L 1 2 3 J1024D 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J131 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ...

Page 1210: ...LD15 3 2 1 1 2 3 J1251 2 1 M 1 2 J1045L 1 2 J1045D 1 2 3 J1063 1 2 3 4 J1038D 1 2 3 4 J1038L J1038DH 2 4 3 1 J1035DH J1035D J1035L 1 2 3 4 J1221 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1117L 1 2 3 4 J1036D J1036DH 1 2 3 4 J1036L J1033DH J1033L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1117LH 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1117D J1033D 1 2 3 4 5 J1101 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1069 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 1...

Page 1211: ...P PWM GND HV I2C SCL HV I2C SDA HV DEV AC CLK P HV DEV AC CLK N HV DEV AC ENA K HV DEV AC ENA C HV DEV AC ENA M HV DEV AC ENA Y HV TR2 N CLK HV TR2 P CLK HV TR2 ISNS 1 2 TH04 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 31 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 J203 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 31 34 35 36 37 38 39 4...

Page 1212: ... 4 M 2 1 J1161DH 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1161L 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J702 SOLD37 SOLD38 SOLD42 SOLD41 1 2 3 4 J1168L 1 2 3 4 J1168D J1046D J1046L 1 2 1 2 J1161D 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J701 SOLD35 SOLD36 SOLD40 SOLD39 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 J1099D 1 2 3 4 J1213L 1 2 3 4 J1213D J1213DH J1334DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1334D 1 2 3 4...

Page 1213: ...1132L J1133LH J1133D 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 M 1 2 3 4 M 1 2 3 J1123 J1124 1 2 3 J1125 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 J1126 1 2 3 J1128 1 2 3 J1127 3 2 1 3 2 1 J1263 1 2 3 J1262 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 J1135D 1 2 3 4 J1135L 1 2 3 4 J1134D 2 1 M 1 2 3 4 J1134L 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1187L J1187LH 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J1187D 1 2 J1129L 2 1 J1188D 1 2 J1129D J1188LH J1188L 3 2 1 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 3...

Page 1214: ... CPU KEY Touch Panel LCD Option Option Option Option CC VI I F Cable CC VI Serial I F USB MEMORY UI POWER FAN RMT L2 FAX FAX I F POWER FAX I F ROMBUS SATA Signal SATA Power Power POWER SW POWER FAN RMT MAIN POWER SW SEESAW L2 G3 FAX L1 C_PSU CONTROL PANEL HDD UI IF Option_B Option_A US Only CC VI I F Cable Card Reader Card Reader IF kit Card Reader USB H USB D Ethernet RS Conv Controller UN05 Main...

Page 1215: ..._L1 1LINE_CT2 1LINE_CT1 1LINE_T2 1LINE_T1 roop1 roop2 2LINE_L1 2LINE_L2 J4 J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 J4507 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J4506 3 4 5 6 1 2 J4508 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 J1 2 3 4 1 J9 2 3 1 J5 1 2 3 J8 1 2 3 J6 1 2 J4 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J3 2 1 J1401 J41DH 1 2 J41D 1 2 J41L 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 2...

Page 1216: ... D E F 4 3 2 7 6 5 1 8 4 3 2 7 6 5 1 8 OR VOICE OPERATION J13 VOICE GUIDANCE VOICE Option J6004 SATA POWER Removable HDD SATA J6003 HDD HDD HDD Option UN05 Main Controller PCB UN05 Main Controller PCB General Circuit Diagram 1194 ...

Page 1217: ...7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 50 J401 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 47 49 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 50 2 3 1 J402 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 J410 J467DH J467D J475D 1 2 J407 J404 J405 J409 15 14 13 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J477...

Page 1218: ...RX_01 BC_RX_11 AP_LOAD_01 AP_LOAD_11 BD_TX_1 GND GND GND GND 6V 6V GND GND GND GND GND 6V GND 12V 12V 12V 12V GND 3 4V Main Controlle PCB 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 J2 J1 13 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 50 3 2 1 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 20 19 18 17 16 25 24 23 22 21 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 49 47 50 48 46 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24...

Page 1219: ...GND SKEY3 SKEY2 SKEY1 SKEY0 J1 J11 SKEY6 J5 SKEY5 SKEY4 J1009 Foot Switch 3 3NFC SPI_MISO SPI_MOSI SPI_SCK SPI_PCS GND GND GND NFC_INT GND SPM N C SPP J8 J1 J9 Option 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J1007 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 J1002 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 12 11 10 9 8 2 3...

Page 1220: ...UXN_S INTOUT_NFC UI_TXD_N UI_RXD_N HPDR_LCD_ON J1020 NFC_RXD_N SET_ROM_LED GND SOFTSW_N J1021 FCT_MOD GND 12S GND 5A J4501 J4502 1 2 3 1 2 3 J20 1 2 3 J21 J22 1 2 3 4 5 6 J18 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J19 J1024 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 1 2 3 4 5 J1021 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 J4502 COR04 Control Panel Motion Sensor Device Port LED PCB Main Co...

Page 1221: ... J2 J401 5V 5V SIZE_AB SIZE_INCH GND GND READER J2 LED_UNIT_L LED_UNIT_R J1 J35D J35DH 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 2 1 J533 2 1 J38D 2 1 J16 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 J7204 2 1 J7197 41 48 50 49 47 46 45 44 43 42 26 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 50 J7018 3 1 2 3 4 1 J7628 18 17 16 15...

Page 1222: ...EATER RELAY BOARD J3 100V_H 200V_H 100V_N_RL 200V_N_RL J4002 200V_N 200V_N 100V_N 100V_N 100V_H 200V_H 2 3 1 100V_H 200V_H 2 3 4 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 J5005M 2 3 1 J5005F 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 J5014F J5011M 2 1 2 3 1 J5010M 2 3 1 J5013F 2 1 Reader Heater HTR8 Reader Heater HTR7 Reader Heater General Circuit Diagram 1200 ...

Page 1223: ...s of the To ner Container Black 073 The number of installations of a new Toner Con tainer Magenta 065 The number of premature replacements of the To ner Container Yellow 074 The number of installations of a new Toner Con tainer Cyan 066 The number of premature replacements of the To ner Container Magenta 081 The number of installations of a new Toner Con tainer the number of premature replacements...

Page 1224: ...lack 1 170 Total B Full Color Single Color Large 133 Total A Black 2 171 Total B Full Color Single Color Small 134 Total A Single Color Large 172 Total B Full Color Single Color 2 135 Total A Single Color Small 173 Total B Full Color Single Color 1 136 Total A Black Large 181 Unidentified Toner Bottle Black 137 Total A Black Small 182 Unidentified Toner Bottle Yellow 138 Total A1 2 sided 183 Unide...

Page 1225: ...py A Black 1 294 Local copy Black Small 2 sided 300 to 399 Number on the screen Counter item Number on the screen Counter item 301 Print Total 1 332 PDL print Total 2 302 Print Total 2 333 PDL print Large 303 Print Large 334 PDL print Small 304 Print Small 335 PDL print Full Color 1 305 Print A Total 1 336 PDL print Full Color 2 306 Print A Total 2 337 PDL print Single Color 1 307 Print A Large 33...

Page 1226: ... Number on the screen Counter item 501 Scan Total 1 507 Black scan Large 502 Scan Total 2 508 Black scan small 503 Black scan Large 509 Color scan Total 1 504 Scan Small 510 Color scan Total 2 505 Black scan Total 1 511 Color scan Large 506 Black scan Total 2 512 Color scan Small 600 to 699 Number on the screen Counter item Number on the screen Counter item 601 Mail Box print Total 1 622 Mail Box ...

Page 1227: ...Small 721 Reception Print Full Color Large 2 sided 747 Network print Full Color 1 722 Reception Print Full Color Small 2 sided 748 Network print Full Color 2 725 Reception Print Black Large 2 dided 749 Network print Black 1 726 Reception Print Black Small 2 sided 750 Network print Black 2 727 Advanced Box print Total 1 751 Network print Full Color Large 728 Advanced Box print Total 2 752 Network p...

Page 1228: ...ory media scan Black 921 Transmission scan total 5 Color 961 Application scan Total 1 922 Transmission scan total 5 Black 962 Application black scan Total 1 929 Transmission scan total 6 Color 963 Application color scan Total 1 930 Transmission scan total 6 Black 964 Advanced Box scan Color 937 Mail Box scan Color 965 Advanced Box scan Black 938 Mail Box scan Black 939 Remote scan Color 940 Remote...

Page 1229: ...ce registration cannot be cancelled after deleting the user data User data deletion To delete user data execute Settings Registration Management Settings System Management Initialize All Data Settings Performing Initialize All Data Settings returns setting values of Settings Registration menu to their factory defaults Deletion Mode can be changed Normally Once with 0 Null Data can sufficiently del...

Page 1230: ...t is output after Initialize All Data Settings is completed Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details when executing Initialize All Data Settings upon user s request Operation after Initialize All Data Settings The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data Settings without displaying the message Turn OFF the main power supply on th...

Page 1231: ...F of report output is not provided There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper Only the output of this report remains in the job log Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values Service Mode Lev1 Function CLEAR MN CONT NOTE When MN CON clear is executed the address book on the HDD is not deleted As for the user data initialize all the data When MN CON clear is execut...

Page 1232: ...t PCB Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION Printer engine DC Controller PCB DC CON Reader ADF Main Controller PCB R CON Inner Finisher Finisher Controller PCB SORTER Staple Booklet Finish er Finisher Controller PCB SORTER SORT SLV Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB SDL STCH Puncher Unit Puncher Controller PCB PUNCH Buffer Path Unit Buffer Path Controller PCB BF PASS Target PCBs of Automatic Update 1210...

Page 1233: ...Restored BOARD OPTION MENU 2 Restored Restored Restored BOARD OPTION MENU 3 Restored Restored Restored BOARD OPTION MENU 4 Restored Restored Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y DF Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY STRD POS Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X MG Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJY...

Page 1234: ... Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M7 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M8 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M9 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S1 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S3 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S4 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S5 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S6 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S7 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S8 Restored COPIER ADJUST CC...

Page 1235: ...COLOR MD OFS K Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS Y Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS M Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS C Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS K Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS Y Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS M Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS C Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS K Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS Y Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS M Resto...

Page 1236: ...Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS D Y LVL Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS D M LVL Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS D C LVL Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS D K LVL Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA F Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA R Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST F1 Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST R1 Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST F1 Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST R1 Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST ...

Page 1237: ...PIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR5 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR6 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR7 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR8 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV1 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV3 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV4 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV5 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV6 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV7 Rest...

Page 1238: ...ed COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL1 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL3 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL4 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL5 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL6 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL7 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL8 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL9 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL10 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL11 Restored...

Page 1239: ...ACS EN Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS CNT Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS EN2 Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS CNT2 Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG ADJ3 Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC K ADJ3 Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS ADJ3 Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS EN3 Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS CNT3 Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC SH ADJ Restored COPIER ADJUST MISC SH ADJ2 Restored COPIER ADJUST PASCAL O...

Page 1240: ... FNC SW DH SW Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DRM IDL Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW SENS CNF Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW CONFIG Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW DATA Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK IFAX LIM Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TEMP TBL Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW W SCNR Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK SMTPTXPN Restored Restored Res...

Page 1241: ...ON IMG SPD FX D TMP Restored COPIER OPTION IMG SPD FIX ROT Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FX S TMP Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON REPORT Z Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON IFXEML Z Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON BMLNKS Z Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW KSIZE SW Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK LPD PORT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW ORG A4R Restore...

Page 1242: ...PIER OPTION NETWORK 802XTOUT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK NCONF SW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM ABK TOOL Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF Y Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF M Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF C Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF K Restored COPIER OPTION FEED SW PINT REG Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID R...

Page 1243: ...red COPIER OPTION FNC SW JLK PWSC Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK DDNSINTV Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FX WNKL Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW FAX INT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW PDL Z LG Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS LVUP Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB12 Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB13 R...

Page 1244: ...ON NETWORK WLAN USE Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW CE DSP Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK WLANPORT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW LIMFNC M Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW LOCAL SZ Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM PSCL QS Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TIFFJPEG Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW PORT Resto...

Page 1245: ...ION DSPLY SW ERR DISP Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW SVC ACA Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK INTENT Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON BIN SEL Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW RMT CNCT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW SVC SRA Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW LF DSP S Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW LF DSP U Restore...

Page 1246: ...d COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B32 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B33 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B34 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B35 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B36 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B37 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B38 Restored Restored Restored COPIER...

Page 1247: ...d COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V06 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V07 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V08 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V09 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V10 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V11 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V12 Restored Restored Restored COPIER...

Page 1248: ...d Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V60 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V61 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V62 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V63 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V64 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V65 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V66 Restored Restor...

Page 1249: ...Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION PM MSG D WST TNR Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION PM MSG D PT DR Y Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION PM MSG D PT DR M Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION PM MSG D PT DR C Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION PM MSG D PT DRM Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION PM MSG D FX REP Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION PM MSG D DF R...

Page 1250: ...SND RATE Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER FREG SW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER IFAX SZL Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER IFAX PGD Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER MEAPSAFE Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER PRNT POS Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER AFN PSWD Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER PTJAM RC Restored Restore...

Page 1251: ...R SFT OUT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER LGCY SCP Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER VC CNT Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER VC AVE Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER VC HIGH Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER VC LOW Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER FLM DSPL Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER FMTMH2M Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER CNT PRT Rest...

Page 1252: ...PD Restored SORTER ADJUST STP SPD Restored SORTER ADJUST RBLT PS2 Restored SORTER ADJUST PULL SPD Restored SORTER ADJUST SFT AMT Restored Restored SORTER ADJUST RBLT PS3 Restored SORTER OPTION MD SPRTN Restored SORTER OPTION BUFF SW Restored SORTER OPTION 1SHT SRT Restored Restored SORTER OPTION NSRT STC Restored Restored SORTER OPTION MSTP TMG Restored Restored Restored SORTER OPTION FR ST PO Res...

Reviews:

No comments